Online User's Guide
HL-L3220CDW
HL-L3240CDW
HL-L3280CDW
HL-L3295CDW
© 2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Before You Use Your Machine ............................................................................................................. 1
Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada) ................................................................................... 3
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Open Source Licensing.................................................................................................................................. 5
Copyright and License ................................................................................................................................... 6
Important Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 7
Introduction to Your Machine............................................................................................................... 8
Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 9
Front View and Back View ........................................................................................................................... 10
Control Panel Overview ............................................................................................................................... 13
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD ....................................................................................................... 18
How to Enter Text on Your Machine............................................................................................................. 19
Access Brother Utilities (Windows) .............................................................................................................. 20
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) ................................................................................... 22
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine ............................................................................................. 23
Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 24
Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 25
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 26
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 30
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot .................................................................................. 38
Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 45
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 46
Change the Check Paper Setting....................................................................................................... 47
Unprintable Area .......................................................................................................................................... 48
Recommended Print Media ......................................................................................................................... 49
Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 50
Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 51
Print from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................... 52
Print a Document (Windows).............................................................................................................. 53
Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 55
Secure Print (Windows)...................................................................................................................... 60
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................... 62
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation)
(Windows) .......................................................................................................................................... 64
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) .................................................. 65
Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 66
Print an Email Attachment............................................................................................................................ 67
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive ................................................................................................. 68
Compatible USB Flash Drives............................................................................................................ 69
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage ................. 70
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) ............................................................................... 72
Print Duplicate Copies.................................................................................................................................. 73
Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 74
Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 75
Home > Table of Contents
i
Universal Print.............................................................................................................................................. 76
Universal Print Overview .................................................................................................................... 77
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management.................................... 78
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal.................................................................... 79
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer ................................................................... 80
Print Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 81
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print ................................................................................... 82
Network ................................................................................................................................................ 83
Supported Basic Network Features ............................................................................................................. 84
Configure Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 85
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel........................................................................... 86
Wireless Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 87
Use the Wireless Network .................................................................................................................. 88
Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
............................................................................................................................. 105
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 110
Print the WLAN Report......................................................................................................................111
Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 115
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel................................................. 116
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................ 117
Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 118
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 119
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 122
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 124
Security .............................................................................................................................................. 125
Before Using Network Security Features ................................................................................................... 126
Disable Unnecessary Protocols ....................................................................................................... 127
Configure Certificates for Device Security ................................................................................................. 128
Supported Security Certificate Features .......................................................................................... 129
How to Create and Install a Certificate............................................................................................. 130
Create a Self-signed Certificate ....................................................................................................... 131
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority
(CA) .................................................................................................................................................. 132
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key ........................................................................... 136
Import and Export a CA Certificate................................................................................................... 139
Manage Multiple Certificates ............................................................................................................ 142
Use SSL/TLS ............................................................................................................................................. 143
Introduction to SSL/TLS ................................................................................................................... 144
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 147
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS ...................................................................................... 151
Use SNMPv3.............................................................................................................................................. 153
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 ............................................................... 154
Use IPsec................................................................................................................................................... 155
Introduction to IPsec......................................................................................................................... 156
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management ............................................................................ 157
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management ......................................... 159
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management ....................................................... 161
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ......................................................... 169
Home > Table of Contents
ii
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? .............................................................................................. 170
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)............................................................................................................ 171
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods............................................................................................... 173
Use Active Directory Authentication........................................................................................................... 174
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication................................................................................. 175
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management .................................... 176
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 177
Use LDAP Authentication........................................................................................................................... 178
Introduction to LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................ 179
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management.................................................... 180
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 181
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 ................................................................................................................... 182
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0........................................................................................... 183
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management ............................................ 184
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 ...................................................................... 185
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features................................................................................. 186
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel ............................................................ 187
Send an Email Securely............................................................................................................................. 188
Configure Email Sending Using Web Based Management.............................................................. 189
Send an Email with User Authentication .......................................................................................... 190
Send an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS ......................................................................................... 191
Store Print Log to Network ......................................................................................................................... 192
Store Print Log to Network Overview ............................................................................................... 193
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management....................... 194
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting .......................................................... 196
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel .................................................................................... 198
Setting Lock Overview...................................................................................................................... 199
Use Global Network Detection Features.................................................................................................... 203
Enable Global IP Address Detection ................................................................................................ 204
Block Communications from the Global Network ............................................................................. 205
Mobile/Web Connect......................................................................................................................... 206
Brother Web Connect................................................................................................................................. 207
Brother Web Connect Overview....................................................................................................... 208
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect............................................................................ 210
Set Up Brother Web Connect........................................................................................................... 212
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect ......................................................... 220
AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 222
AirPrint Overview.............................................................................................................................. 223
Before Using AirPrint (macOS) ........................................................................................................ 224
Print Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 225
Mopria
™
Print Service................................................................................................................................ 228
Brother Mobile Connect ............................................................................................................................. 229
Register an External IC Card Reader ........................................................................................................ 230
Brother iPrint&Scan.......................................................................................................................... 231
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) ............................................................................................. 232
Home > Table of Contents
iii
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 233
Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 234
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature .............................................................. 243
Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 245
Clear Paper Jams............................................................................................................................. 246
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 247
Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot ...................................................................................... 248
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 249
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 251
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 253
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray............................................................................................... 255
Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 257
Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 260
Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 265
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 266
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) ...................................................................... 269
Check Your Machine's Network Settings.......................................................................................... 270
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network ................................................................ 271
AirPrint Problems ....................................................................................................................................... 277
Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 278
Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 280
Reset Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 281
Machine Reset ................................................................................................................................. 282
Network Reset.................................................................................................................................. 283
Factory Reset ................................................................................................................................... 284
Routine Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 285
Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 286
Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 288
Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 292
Replace the Belt Unit........................................................................................................................ 296
Replace the Waste Toner Box .......................................................................................................... 300
Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 304
Clean the LED Heads....................................................................................................................... 306
Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 307
Clean the Corona Wires ................................................................................................................... 308
Clean the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................... 310
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 319
Correct Color Printing................................................................................................................................. 321
Set the Auto Correction Function ..................................................................................................... 322
Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings................................................................................ 323
Check the Remaining Part Life .................................................................................................................. 324
Pack and Ship Your Machine ..................................................................................................................... 325
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 327
Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 328
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 329
General Settings............................................................................................................................... 330
Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 339
Home > Table of Contents
iv
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ...................................................................... 358
What is Web Based Management?.................................................................................................. 359
Access Web Based Management .................................................................................................... 360
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management...................................................... 362
Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 363
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 364
5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean
countries only)............................................................................................................................................ 372
Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 373
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life...................................................................................... 375
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 376
Brother Help and Customer Support.......................................................................................................... 377
Home > Table of Contents
v
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Definitions of Notes
Definitions of Notes
We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
NOTE
NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special
conditions of use.
Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.
Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.
Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.
Italics Italicized style emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New
Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
2
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT
WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS
OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S
LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
3
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Trademarks
Trademarks
Apple, App Store, AirPrint, Mac, macOS, iPadOS, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Adobe
®
, Reader
®
, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, and Wi-Fi Direct
®
are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
WPA
™
, WPA2
™
, WPA3
™
, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
Android, Google Drive and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC. Use of these trademarks is subject to
Google Permissions.
Mopria
™
and the Mopria
™
Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
EVERNOTE is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Brother Industries, Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
Software Trademarks
FlashFX
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Pro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Tera
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance Nitro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents
and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
4
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Open Source Licensing
Open Source Licensing
This product includes open source software.
To view Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright Information, go to your model's Manuals page at
support.brother.com/manuals.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
5
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Copyright and License
Copyright and License
©2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2020 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
FlashFX
®
Copyright 1998-2020 Datalight, Inc.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
6
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Important Notes
Important Notes
• Check support.brother.com/downloads for Brother driver and software updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check support.brother.com/downloads for the latest firmware
upgrade. Otherwise, some of your machine's functions may not be available.
• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and
power regulations of that country.
• Not all models are available in all countries.
• Before giving your machine to anyone else, replacing it, or disposing of it, we strongly recommend resetting it
to its factory settings to remove all personal information.
• Windows 10 in this document represents Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Education, and
Windows 10 Enterprise.
• Windows 11 in this document represents Windows 11 Home, Windows 11 Pro, Windows 11 Education, and
Windows 11 Enterprise.
• For macOS v13 Users:
This machine supports macOS v13.
For machine setup and software installation instructions, see the Quick Setup Guide included in the carton.
All features in macOS v11 and macOS v12 are available in the macOS v13 environment and work in a similar
way.
• In this User's Guide, the LCD messages of the HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3295CDW are used unless otherwise
specified.
• In this User's Guide, the illustrations of the HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3295CDW are used unless otherwise
specified.
• The screens or images in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from those of the
actual products.
• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 10. Screens on your computer may
vary depending on your operating system.
• The contents of this document and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
7
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Before Using Your Machine
Before Using Your Machine
Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.
Firewall (Windows)
If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, you may need to configure the
firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the drivers using the steps in the
installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other personal firewall
software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
9
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Front View and Back View
Front View and Back View
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW
>> HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Front View
2 3
4
5
1
7
6
Back View
8
9
10
11
12
1. Control panel with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
2. Face-down output tray support flap
3. Face-down output tray
4. Paper tray
5. Manual feed slot cover
6. Top cover
7. Manual feed slot
8. (For wired network models)
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port
9. USB port
10. AC power connector
11. Back cover (Face-up output tray)
12. 2‑sided tray
10
The machine is equipped with a non-detachable AC power cord depending on the model.
HL-L3280CDW
Front View
2 3
4
5
1
7
6
Back View
8
9
10
11
12
1. Touch panel with touchscreen LCD
2. Face-down output tray support flap
3. Face-down output tray
4. Paper tray
5. Manual feed slot cover
6. Top cover
7. Manual feed slot
8. (For wired network models)
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port
9. USB port
10. AC power connector / cord
11. Back cover (Face-up output tray)
12. 2‑sided tray
11
HL-L3295CDW
Front View
2 3
4
5
1
7
6
Back View
9
10
11
12
8
13
1. Touch panel with touchscreen LCD
2. Face-down output tray support flap
3. Face-down output tray
4. Paper tray
5. Multi-purpose tray (MP tray) cover
6. Top cover
7. Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
8. USB accessory port (Front)
9. (For wired network models)
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port
10. USB port
11. AC power connector / cord
12. Back cover (Face-up output tray)
13. 2‑sided tray
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
12
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Control Panel Overview
Control Panel Overview
The control panel may vary depending on your model.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1
9
4
5
6
3
2
8
7
1. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Displays messages to help you set up and use the machine.
A four-level indicator shows the wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection.
0 Max
2. WiFi
Launch the wireless installer on your computer and press the WiFi button. Follow the on-screen instructions
to configure a wireless connection between your machine and your network.
When the WiFi light is on, your machine is connected to a wireless access point. When the WiFi light blinks,
the wireless connection was interrupted, or your machine is in the process of connecting to a wireless access
point.
3. Menu Buttons
OK
Press to select the displayed option. After you change a setting, the machine returns to the previous menu
level.
Back
• Press to go back one level in the menu.
13
• Press to select the previous digit when entering letters or numbers.
a or b (+ or -)
• Press to scroll through menus and options.
• Press to enter or change a letter or number. Hold down a or b to scroll faster. When you see the letter
or number you want, press OK.
4. Secure
Press to print any jobs saved in the machine's memory. You need to enter your four-digit password.
5. Go
• Press to clear certain error messages. To clear any other error messages, follow the LCD instructions.
• Press to print any data remaining in the machine's memory.
• Press to select the displayed option. After you select an option, the machine returns to Ready Mode.
6. Error LED
The Error LED blinks when the LCD displays an error or an important status message.
7. Data LED
The Data LED blinks depending on the machine’s status.
When the Data LED is on, data is in the machine’s memory. When the Data LED blinks, the machine is
receiving or processing data.
8.
Cancel
• Press to cancel the current setting.
• Press to cancel a programmed print job and clear it from the machine’s memory. To cancel multiple print
jobs, press and hold Cancel until the LCD displays [Cancel All Jobs].
9. Power On/Off
• Turn on the machine by pressing .
• Turn off the machine by pressing and holding down
.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
2
1
5
4
3
1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Access menus and options by pressing them on the touchscreen.
From the Home screen, you can access the WiFi setup, Toner level, Settings, Functions, and Secure Print
screens.
The Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle.
14
1. (Wireless Status)
Press to configure wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator on the Home screen displays the current
wireless signal strength.
0 Max
If you see displayed as the wireless status, press it to select a wireless connection method or
configure an existing wireless connection.
2. IP Address
If the IP Address setting in the Screen Settings menu is turned on, your machine's IP Address appears on
the Home screen.
3.
[Secure Print]
Press to access the Secure Print option.
4.
(Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
5. [Settings]
Press to access the [Settings] menu.
Use the Settings menu to access all of your machine's settings.
If the Setting Lock is set to On, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to
change any settings.
6.
[Functions]
Press to access the Functions screen.
•
[Web]
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
• [Direct Print] (HL-L3295CDW)
Press to access the Direct Print menu.
15
Warning icon
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press to view it,
address the issue, and then press to return to Ready Mode.
2. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
3.
Power On/Off
• Turn on the machine by pressing .
• Turn off the machine by pressing and holding down .
4. Near Field Communication (NFC) (HL-L3295CDW)
Use card authentication, if applicable, by touching your Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card) to the NFC symbol
on the machine.
16
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, press a or b on the LCD to
scroll through them.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
NOTE
DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning on the machine. Doing this
may cause an error.
This product uses fonts owned by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
18
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Enter Text on Your Machine
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
When text is required, enter characters on the machine. The characters that are available may differ depending
on the operation you perform.
• Hold down or repeatedly press a or b to select a character from this list:
0123456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ(space)!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?
@[\]^_‘{|}~
• Press OK when the character or symbol you want is displayed, and then enter the next character.
• Press Back to delete characters entered incorrectly.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
• When you must enter text on your machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD.
• The characters that are available may differ depending on your country.
• The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers, and special characters.
• Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters.
• To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c.
Inserting spaces
• To enter a space, press [Space].
Making corrections
• If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect
character and press
. Enter the correct character.
• To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character.
• Press
for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
19
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on
your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows 11)
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows 10, Windows Server 2016 and Windows Server 2019)
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows Server 2012 R2)
Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click
(if you are using a touch-
based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).
When the Apps screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities).
• (Windows Server 2012)
Tap or click
(Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.
2. Select your machine.
3. Choose the option you want.
20
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Software and
Drivers (Windows)
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows 11)
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• Windows 10, Windows Server 2016 and Windows Server 2019
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• Windows Server 2012 R2
Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click
(if you are using a touch-
based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).
When the Apps screen appears, tap or click
(Brother Utilities).
• Windows Server 2012
Tap or click (Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.
2. Select your model from the drop-down list (if it is not already selected).
3. Click Tools in the left navigation bar.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is visible, select it, and then click Check now > Check for
Software Updates > Update. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is not visible, go to the next step.
4. Click Uninstall in the Tools section of Brother Utilities.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.
Related Information
• Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
22
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
The input/output ports are located on the front and back of the machine.
2
3
1
1. USB accessory port (Front) (HL-L3295CDW)
2. 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port (For wired network models)
3. USB port
When connecting the USB or network cable, follow the instructions in the software/driver installer.
To install driver and software necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
23
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray
Load Paper in the Paper Tray
• If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message
appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if
needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release lever (1) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back
of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are not available in some regions.)
1
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.
When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related Information: Change
Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray.
27
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
28
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper
Tray
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the paper tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face down
• top edge toward the front of the paper tray
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face up
• bottom edge toward the front of the paper tray
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [Printer]. Press OK.
b. Select [2-sided]. Press OK.
c. Select [Single Image]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to select [2-sided Feed], and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Paper Tray
29
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
• Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
• Printing Problems
30
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
12
31
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• When using glossy paper, load only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
• When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation. See Related Information:
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray
32
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using
the MP Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP
Tray
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the MP tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face up
• top edge first
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face down
• bottom edge first
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
33
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
When the back cover (face up output tray) is pulled down, the machine has a straight paper path from the MP
tray through to the back of the machine. Use this paper feed and output method when you print on labels.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
12
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
34
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
6. Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
7. Send your print job to the machine.
8. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
35
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
You can load up to three envelopes in the MP tray.
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Pull down the two gray levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
36
4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
12
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using.
6. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Load up to three envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are
below the maximum paper mark (1). Loading more than three envelopes may cause paper jams.
7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
8. Send your print job to the machine.
9. When you have finished printing, return the two gray levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their
original positions.
10. Close the back cover (face-up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
37
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
• Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
• Load and Print on Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
• Load and Print on Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
38
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print
Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on
your computer at the same time.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the manual feed slot cover.
3. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
39
4. Using both hands, place one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper
feed roller. When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
• Load paper into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up.
• Make sure the paper is straight and in the correct position in the manual feed slot. If it is not, the paper
may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
5. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
6. After the printed page comes out from the machine, load the next sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
Repeat for each page that you want to print.
Related Information
• Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
40
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print on
Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print on Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on
your computer at the same time.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
The machine automatically turns on Manual Feed mode when you load paper in the manual feed slot.
2. On the front of the machine, open the manual feed slot cover.
3. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the paper that you are using.
4. Using both hands, place one sheet of label in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed
roller. When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
41
• Load label into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up.
• Pull the label out completely if you must reload the label into the manual feed slot.
• Do not put more than one sheet of label in the manual feed slot at one time, as it may cause a jam.
• Make sure the label is straight and in the correct position in the manual feed slot. If it is not, the label
may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
5. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
6. After the printed page comes out from the back of the machine, load the next sheet of label in the manual
feed slot. Repeat for each page that you want to print.
7. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
42
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print on
Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print on Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on
your computer at the same time.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
The machine automatically turns on Manual Feed mode when you load paper in the manual feed slot.
2. Pull down the two gray levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the manual feed slot cover.
4. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the envelope that you are using.
43
5. Using both hands, put one envelope in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed roller.
When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
• Load the envelope into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up.
• Pull the envelope out completely when you reload the envelope into the manual feed slot.
• Do not put more than one envelope in the manual feed slot at one time, as it may cause a jam.
• Make sure the envelope is straight and in the correct position on the manual feed slot. If it is not, the
envelope may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
6. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
7. After the printed envelope comes out of the machine, load the next envelope. Repeat for each envelope that
you want to print.
8. When you have finished printing, return the two gray levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their
original positions.
9. Close the back cover (face-up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
44
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
When you change the size and type of paper you load in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the LCD.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Tray Setting]. Press OK.
c. Select [Paper Type]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the paper type you want, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to display the [Paper Size] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to display the paper size you want, and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper Type].
2. Press a or b to display the paper tray options, and then press the option you want.
3. Press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.
4. Press
.
5. Press a or b to display the [Paper Size] option, and then press [Paper Size].
6. Press a or b to display the paper tray options, and then press the option you want.
7. Press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
46
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Setting
Change the Check Paper Setting
When the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, or load paper in the
MP tray, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type.
The default setting is On.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Tray Setting]. Press OK.
c. Select [Check Paper]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [On] or [Off] option, and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check
Paper].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
47
Home > Paper Handling > Unprintable Area
Unprintable Area
The measurements in the table below show maximum unprintable areas from the edges of the most commonly
used paper sizes. The measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you
are using.
1
3
24
Do not attempt to print into these areas; your output will not reflect anything in these areas.
Usage Document Size Top (1)
Bottom (3)
Left (2)
Right (4)
Print Letter 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)
A4 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)
Legal 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)
Related Information
• Paper Handling
48
Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media
Recommended Print Media
To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.
Paper Type Item
Plain Paper Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper, 20 lb
(20 lb = 75 g/m
2
)
Hammermill Laser Print
(24 lb = 90 g/m
2
)
Recycled Paper No specific brand recommended
Labels Avery laser labels white #5160
Envelopes No specific brand recommended
Glossy Paper NewPage Futura Laser Gloss 80 lb Text
(80 lb =118 g/m
2
)
Related Information
• Paper Handling
49
Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper
Using Special Paper
Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.
• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit
degraded performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct
sunlight, and heat.
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased, or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not
covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
Related Information
• Paper Handling
50
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Print Settings (Windows)
• Secure Print (Windows)
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
•
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language
Emulation) (Windows)
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
52
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document (Windows)
Print a Document (Windows)
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.
5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the
application.
6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.
7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.
8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets,
click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.
9. Change other printer settings, if needed.
10. Click OK.
11. Complete your print operation.
53
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print Settings (Windows)
Print Settings (Windows)
>> Basic Tab
>> Advanced Tab
Basic Tab
1. Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a custom
paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Copies
Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.
Collate
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is
selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of
55
copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of
copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.
4. Media Type
Select the media type you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts its
print settings according to the selected media type.
5. Print Quality
Select the print quality you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the
longer it will take to print the document.
6. Color / Mono
Select the Color/Mono settings to use.
NOTE
• The machine’s color sensor is very sensitive and may perceive faded black text or an off-white
background as color. If you know that your document is black and white and you want to conserve
color toner, select the Mono mode.
• If either the Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a color document,
the print job cannot be completed. Cancel your print job and select to start the print job again in the
Mono mode, as long as the Black toner is available.
7. Document Type
Select the type of document you want to print.
Settings button
Specify advanced settings, such as color mode.
Color Mode
Select the color mode to suit your preference.
Import
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, import those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Export option to create a print configuration file from the current settings.
Export
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, export those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Import option to load a previously exported configuration file.
Improve Gray Color
Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black Printing
If a black graphic does not print correctly, select this setting.
Improve Pattern Printing
Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the fills
and patterns you see on your computer screen.
8. Multiple Page
Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, or print one page of your document on
multiple sheets.
Page Order
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Border Line
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
56
9. 2-sided / Booklet (available for certain models)
Select this option to print on both sides of the paper, or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided
printing.
2-sided Settings button
Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each
orientation.
10. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
First Page
Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.
Other Pages
Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.
Advanced Tab
1. Scaling
Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.
57
Fit to Paper Size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select
this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.
Free [ 25 - 400 % ]
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a
value into the field.
2. Reverse Print
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
3. Use Watermark
Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset
watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.
4. Header-Footer Print
Select this option to print the date, time, and login user name on the document.
5. Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to use less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are still legible.
6. Secure Print
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents are not printed out until you enter a password
on the machine's control panel.
7. Administrator
This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.
8. User Authentication
This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.
9. Other Print Options button
Sleep Time
Select this option to set the machine to enter sleep mode immediately after printing.
Macro/Stream
Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro/stream), which you have stored in your machine's
memory, as an overlay on the print job.
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
Edge Emphasis
Select this option to make the text appear sharper.
Skip Blank Page
Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from
printing.
TrueType Mode
Mode
Select how the fonts are processed for printing.
Use Printer TrueType Fonts(available for certain models)
Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.
Eco settings
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
58
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Secure Print (Windows)
Secure Print (Windows)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on
the machine's control panel.
The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK.
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, press Secure.
12. Press a or b to display your user name, and then press OK.
13. Enter your four-digit password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK.
14. Press a or b to display the job, and then press OK.
15. Press a or b to select the [Print] option, and then press OK.
16. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
17. Press OK.
The machine prints the data.
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK.
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, press [Secure Print].
60
12. Press a or b to display the user names, and then press to select your user name.
13. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
14. Press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
15. Enter the number of copies you want.
16. Press [Start].
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
61
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
When you change an application's print settings, the changes only apply to documents printed with that
application. To change print settings for all Windows applications, you must configure the printer driver
properties.
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button.
The printer driver dialog box appears.
• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab (available for certain models).
• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.
4. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults for all of your Windows programs.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
62
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings
(Windows) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and check the machine's serial
number.
The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the
Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps:
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Click the Auto Detect button.
The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:
• The machine is turned off.
• The machine is shared via Print Server
• The machine and your computer are not connected.
Related Information
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
63
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer
Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript
®
data more clearly.
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads to install the PS driver (BR-Script3
printer driver).
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model with BR-Script3 in the name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings. (available for certain
models)
Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print
settings. Click OK.
4. Click OK.
5. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
64
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your
Computer (Windows)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
The Status Monitor is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more machines, allowing
you to get immediate notification of errors.
Do one of the following:
- Double-click the
icon in the task tray.
- Launch
(Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model's name (if not
already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the support website.
Visit the Genuine Supplies website
Click the Visit the Genuine Supplies website button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Printing Problems
65
Home > Print > Print an Email Attachment
Print an Email Attachment
You can print files by emailing them to your Brother machine.
• Make sure Web Based Management is set to On. For more information, see Related Information.
• You can attach up to 10 documents, 20 MB in total, to an email.
• This feature supports the following formats:
- Document files: PDF, TXT, and Microsoft Office files
- Image files: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, and TIFF
• The machine prints both the email content and attachments by default. To print only email attachments,
change the settings as necessary.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Online Functions > Online Functions Settings.
• Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
• If this function is locked, contact your network administrator for access.
5. Click the I accept the terms and conditions button.
6. Go to your machine, and then follow the machine's instructions to enable the settings.
7. On your computer, click General Settings.
The Email Print: General Settings screen appears.
8. Click the Enable button.
The machine prints the instruction sheet.
9. Send your email to the email address included on the sheet. The machine prints the email attachments.
• To change the settings, including email address and printer settings, click the Online Functions
Settings Page button.
• (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
You can also configure the settings from your machine. Press [Functions] > [Web] > [Online
Functions], and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
• Print
Related Topics:
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Access Web Based Management
67
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
You can print photos directly from a digital camera or a USB flash drive.
Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.
• Compatible USB Flash Drives
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
• Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
68
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB Flash Drives
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage
standard. Other USB devices are not supported.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
USB Class USB Mass Storage Class
USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i
Transfer Protocol Bulk transfer Only
Format
1
FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT
Sector Size Max. 4096 Byte
Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported.
1
NTFS format is not supported.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
69
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or
Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting
Mass Storage
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to Mass Storage mode.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash
drive to the USB direct interface.
USB Port Location (Front View)
1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The LCD displays the
[Checking Image] message.
• If an error occurs, the USB menu does not appear on the LCD.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the LCD does not display any information even if you
connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press any button on the control panel to wake up
the machine.
• If your machine's Secure Function Lock is On, you may not be able to print from a USB flash drive or
digital camera.
2. Press a or b to select the file you want, and then press it.
To print an index of the files stored on the USB flash drive or digital camera, press [Index Print] on
the touchscreen. Press [Black Start] or [Color Start] to print the data.
3. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Print Settings]. Go to the next step.
• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Black Start] or
[Color Start].
4. Select the print settings you want to change:
• [Print Quality]
• [Tray Use]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Size]
• [Multiple Page]
70
• [Orientation]
• [2-sided]
• [Collate]
• [PDF Print Options]
• [PDF Fit to Page]
Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
5. Press [OK].
6. Enter the number of copies you want.
7. Press [Black Start] or [Color Start] to print the data.
8. Press .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine
has finished printing.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
71
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing
(Windows)
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.
3. Complete your print operation.
4. Enter the required information to save the file.
If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to
save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).
If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
72
Home > Print > Print Duplicate Copies
Print Duplicate Copies
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper.
Send the data to individual paper trays that you loaded with different paper types or colors.
For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray 1, which you have pre-loaded with
blue colored paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you have
loaded with yellow colored paper that already contains text.
If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for
Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray.
If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically.
Windows
The Carbon Copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro/stream for each page.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] > [On].
2. Press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option.
3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
4. Press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray] option.
5. Press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press to
select the paper tray.
Windows
a. Press a or b to display the [Copy1 Stream] option, and then press the [Copy1 Stream] option.
b. Press a or b to display the ID number of the macro/stream you want to use, and then press it.
6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy.
7. Press .
8. Send your print job to the machine.
Related Information
• Print
73
Home > Print > Cancel a Print Job
Cancel a Print Job
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Press Cancel.
To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold Cancel for four seconds.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Press .
To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold for four seconds.
Related Information
• Print
74
Home > Print > Test Print
Test Print
If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print:
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to display the [Printer] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [Print Options] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to display the [Test Print] option, and then press OK.
4. Press Go.
The machine prints the test page.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print].
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Print
75
Home > Print > Universal Print
Universal Print
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
• Universal Print Overview
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
• Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
• Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
• Print Using Universal Print
• Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
76
Home > Print > Universal Print > Universal Print Overview
Universal Print Overview
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Universal Print is a cloud-based print service from Microsoft. You can print documents, from anywhere on the
Internet, without installing a printer driver. Universal Print is available for Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) users
with the Microsoft 365 subscription.
1. Computer running Windows 10 20H1 or greater
2. Cloud server
Related Information
• Universal Print
77
Home > Print > Universal Print > Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
• Make sure you set the correct date and time for your time zone.
• If your network uses a proxy server, configure the proxy server settings.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Universal Print checkbox, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Change your machine's name in the Device Name field if necessary.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
7. Click Register.
If an error occurs, follow the on-screen instructions.
8. A Universal Print user code appears. Click the Sign in button, and then type the user code.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the registration.
Related Information
• Universal Print
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Access Web Based Management
78
Home > Print > Universal Print > Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
You can assign users to the Universal Print service only if your machine is registered on the Microsoft Azure
portal.
1. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL:
portal.azure.com
2. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
3. Select the Universal Print service.
4. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
5. Select the Share option.
6. Select the users you want to assign to the Universal Print service, and then click Share Printer.
Related Information
• Universal Print
79
Home > Print > Universal Print > Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Click > > Devices > Printers & scanners > Add a printer or scanner.
2. Select your machine registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer from the list, and then click Add device.
Related Information
• Universal Print
80
Home > Print > Universal Print > Print Using Universal Print
Print Using Universal Print
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select the machine you registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer, and then click the printer's properties
or preferences button.
3. Change the printer settings, if needed.
4. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Universal Print
81
Home > Print > Universal Print > Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
To deregister your machine, you must delete it from Web Based Management, and then delete it on the Microsoft
Azure portal.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Next to the Universal Print checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
6. Click Delete Registration Data, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
7. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL:
portal.azure.com
8. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
9. Select the Universal Print service.
10. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
11. Click Delete Printer Share.
12. Click Unregister.
Related Information
• Universal Print
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
82
Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features
Supported Basic Network Features
The machine supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which network
features and connections are supported by each operating system.
Operating Systems Windows Windows Server macOS
Printing Yes Yes Yes
Web Based Management
1
Yes Yes Yes
Status Monitor Yes
Driver Deployment Wizard Yes Yes
1
The default password to manage your machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend
immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorized access.
• When connecting your machine to an outside network such as the Internet, make sure your network
environment is protected by a separate firewall or other means in order to prevent information leaks due
to inadequate settings or unauthorized access by malicious third parties.
• When your machine is connected to the global network, a warning appears. When you see this warning,
we strongly recommend confirming your network settings, and then re-connecting to a secure network.
• Enabling your machine's global network communication filtering feature blocks access from the global
network. The global network communication filtering feature may prevent the machine from receiving
certain print jobs from a computer or mobile device that uses a global IP address.
Related Information
• Network
Related Topics:
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
84
Home > Network > Configure Network Settings > Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
To configure the machine for your network, use the control panel's [Network] menu selections.
• For information about the network settings you can configure using the control panel, see Related
Information: Settings Tables.
• You can also use Web Based Management, to configure and change your machine's network settings.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the network option you want, and then press OK. Repeat this step until you access the
menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network].
2. Press a or b to display the network option you want, and then press it. Repeat this step until you access the
menu you want to configure, and then follow the touchscreen LCD instructions.
Related Information
• Configure Network Settings
Related Topics:
• Settings Tables (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
• Settings Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
• Supported Basic Network Features
86
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network
Use the Wireless Network
• Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your
Computer
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel
Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi
Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
88
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Before Configuring Your
Machine for a Wireless Network
Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:
• If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.
• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place your machine as close to the
wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between the
two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your
documents.
Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and
applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics,
you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB
for the fastest throughput speed.
• Although your machine can be used in a wired and wireless network (supported models only), only one
connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct
connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used
at the same time.
• If there is a signal in the vicinity, wireless LAN allows you to freely make a LAN connection. However, if
security settings are not correctly configured, the signal may be intercepted by malicious third-parties,
possibly resulting in:
- Theft of personal or confidential information
- Improper transmission of information to parties impersonating the specified individuals
- Dissemination of transcribed communication contents that were intercepted
Make sure you know your wireless router/access point's Network Name (SSID) and Network Key
(Password). If you cannot find this information, consult the manufacturer of your wireless router/access
point, your system administrator, or Internet provider. Brother cannot provide this information.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
89
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard
from Your Computer
1. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
2. Start the installer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Select Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi), and then click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
You have completed the wireless network setup.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
90
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's
Control Panel Setup Wizard
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports
the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother Customer Service, make sure you
have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating
this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue the wireless setup.
How can I find this information?
- Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
- The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
- If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select the [Find Network] option, and then press OK.
5. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
6. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. When a list of SSIDs appears,
press a or b to select the SSID you want.
7. Press OK.
8. Do one of the following:
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
91
When you have entered all the characters, press OK.
To apply the settings, select [Yes].
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key (Password)
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key (Password)
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports
the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother Customer Service, make sure you
have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating
this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue the wireless setup.
How can I find this information?
- Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
- The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
- If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.
If a list of SSIDs is displayed, press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to connect, and then press
the SSID.
5. Press [OK].
6. Do one of the following:
92
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
93
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from
your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WPS/Push Button] option, and then press OK.
4. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
5. When the LCD displays [Press Key on rtr], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router.
Then follow the LCD instructions on your machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless
access point/router and try to connect to your wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/Push Button].
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then
press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your
machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your
wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
94
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method
of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Method to configure your wireless network settings.
The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. By submitting a PIN
created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up
the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the
instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.
Type A
Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar:
1
Type B
Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar:
2
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
95
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WPS/PIN Code] option, and then press OK.
4. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
5. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
6. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device
you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
7. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more
information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
8. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in
advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/
router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless
configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
9. Select your machine and click Next.
10. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.
11. Click Close.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/PIN Code].
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device
you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
96
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more
information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
6. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in
advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/
router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless
configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
7. Select your machine and click Next.
8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.
9. Click Close.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
97
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not
Broadcast
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Open System NONE -
WEP
Shared Key WEP
WPA/WPA2-PSK AES
TKIP
WPA3-SAE AES
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
WPA2-PSK AES 12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select the [Find Network] option, and then press OK.
5. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
6. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to select the
[<New SSID>] option, and then press OK.
7. Enter the SSID name, and then press OK.
8. Press a or b to select the Authentication Method you want, and then press OK.
9. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [None] or [WEP],
and then press OK.
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption Type, enter the WEP key, and then press OK.
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, enter the WEP key, and then press OK.
98
• If you selected the [WPA-Personal] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or
[AES], and then press OK.
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press OK.
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, select the Encryption Type [AES], and then press OK.
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press OK.
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
10. To apply the settings, select [Yes].
11. The machine will attempt to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Open System NONE -
WEP
Shared Key WEP
WPA/WPA2-PSK AES
TKIP
WPA3-SAE AES
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
WPA2-PSK AES 12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to display the
[<New SSID>] option.
5. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
6. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
99
7. Select the Authentication Method.
8. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press [None] or [WEP].
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE] option, press [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, press [AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
100
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for an
Enterprise Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/NONE AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/GTC AES
TKIP
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
PEAP/GTC AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/PAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TLS AES -
TKIP -
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES Brother 12345678
101
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate
issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client
certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate
name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing
down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the
common name of the server certificate.
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select the [Find Network] option, and then press OK.
5. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
6. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to select the
[<New SSID>] option, and then press OK.
7. Enter the SSID name, and then press OK.
8. Press a or b to select the Authentication Method you want, and then press OK.
9. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, press a or b to select the Inner
Authentication Method [NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [PAP] or [GTC], and then press
OK.
Depending on your Authentication Method, the Inner Authentication Method selections differ.
Press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES], and then press OK.
Press a or b to select the Verification Method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA+Server ID], and
then press OK.
- If you selected the [CA+Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID and password (if required),
and then press OK for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID and the Password, and then press OK for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine will display the message [No
Verification].
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES],
and then press OK.
When the machine displays a list of available Client Certificates, select the certificate you want.
Press a or b to select the Verification Method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA+Server ID], and
then press OK.
- If you selected the [CA+Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press OK for
each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press OK.
10. To apply the settings, press a. To cancel, press b.
11. The machine will attempt to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
102
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/NONE AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/GTC AES
TKIP
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
PEAP/GTC AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/PAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TLS AES -
TKIP -
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES Brother 12345678
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate
issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client
certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate
name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing
down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the
common name of the server certificate.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
103
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to display the
[<New SSID>] option.
5. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
6. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
7. Select the Authentication Method.
8. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, press a or b to select the Inner
Authentication Method [NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP].
Depending on your Authentication Method, the Inner Authentication Method selections may differ.
Select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Select the Verification Method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID, and password (if
required), and then press [OK] for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID and Password, and then press [OK] for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
When the machine displays a list of available Client Certificates, select the certificate you want.
Select the Verification Method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK]
for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK].
9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
104
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. It allows you to
securely connect your mobile device to your machine without using a wireless router/access point.
2
1
1. Mobile device
2. Your machine
• You can use Wi-Fi Direct with the wired or wireless network connection at the same time.
• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner. When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, the Group Owner serves as an access point.
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
106
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Manually
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct or WPS, you must configure a Wi-Fi Direct network manually.
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Wi-Fi Direct] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Manual] option, and then press OK.
4. When [Wi-Fi Direct On?] appears, select On.
5. The machine will display the SSID name and Password. Go to your mobile device's wireless network settings
screen, select the SSID name, and then enter the password.
6. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the machine's control panel:
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual].
2. The machine will display the SSID (Network Name) and Password (Network Key). Go to your mobile device's
wireless network settings screen, select the SSID, and then enter the password.
3. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
4. Press [Close].
Related Information
•
Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
107
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using
the Push Button Method
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
If your mobile device supports Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct network:
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Wi-Fi Direct] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Push Button] option, and then press OK.
4. When [Wi-Fi Direct On?] appears, select On.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following:
a. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
b. Press a or b to select the [Wi-Fi Direct] option, and then press OK.
c. Press a or b to select the [Group Owner] option, and then press OK.
d. Press a or b to select the [On] option, and then press OK.
e. Press a or b to select the [Push Button] option, and then press OK.
5. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when
[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device and press OK.] appears on the machine's LCD.
Press OK on your machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup.
6. Do one of the following:
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile
device. Press a or b to select the mobile device you want to connect to and press OK. To search for
available devices again, select [<Rescan>], and then press OK.
7. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button] on
your machine's LCD.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following:
a. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner],
and then press [On].
b. Press a or b to select the [Push Button].
2. When the [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] message appears,
turn your mobile device‘s Wi-Fi Direct function on (for more information, see your mobile device’s user‘s
guide). Press [OK] on your machine.
3. Do one of the following:
108
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile
device. To search for available devices again, press [Rescan].
4. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
5. Press [Close].
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
109
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option, and then press OK.
4. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On].
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off].
5. Press OK.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)].
2. Press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option. Press [WLAN Enable].
3. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On].
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off].
4. Press
.
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
110
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report
Print the WLAN Report
The WLAN Report shows your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code on
the printed report.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [WLAN Report] option, and then press OK.
3. Press Go.
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report].
2. Press [Yes].
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
3. Press .
If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one
minute and then try to print the report again.
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
111
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error
Codes
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see
the corresponding instructions in the table:
Error Code
Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-01 The WLAN (Wi-Fi) is not enabled.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Enable the WLAN setting on your machine.
• If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it.
TS-02 The wireless router/access point cannot be detected.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Make sure the wireless router/access point is on.
• Temporarily place your machine closer to the wireless router/access point when you are
configuring the wireless settings.
• If your wireless router/access point is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC
address of the machine is allowed in the filter. You can find the MAC address by printing the
Network Configuration Report.
• If you manually entered the Network Name (SSID) and security information (authentication
method/encryption method), the information may be incorrect. Check the Network Name and
security information again and re-enter the correct information.
• Restart your wireless router/access point. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and
security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point,
or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-03
The wireless enterprise network and security settings you entered may be incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
Verify the following information:
- Network Name (SSID) you selected to configure your machine.
- Security information you selected to configure your machine (such as the authentication
method, encryption method, or User ID).
If you still cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-04
Your machine does not support the authentication and encryption methods used by the selected
wireless router/access point.
For infrastructure mode (Most common)
Change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless router/access point. Your
machine supports the following authentication and encryption methods:
• WPA-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA2-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA3-Personal:
AES
• OPEN:
WEP / NONE (without encryption)
• Shared key:
WEP
If your issue is not solved, the Network Name (SSID) or security settings you entered may be
incorrect. Check that all wireless network settings are correct for your network.
112
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-05 The Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password) are incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password).
• If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them
correctly.
• If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your
system administrator, or Internet service provider.
• If your wireless router/access point uses WEP encryption with multiple WEP keys, write
down and use only the first WEP key.
TS-06
The wireless security information (authentication method/encryption method/Network Key
(Password)) is incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Key. If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters,
make sure you type them correctly.
• Confirm whether the authentication method entered and the authentication method or
encryption method supported by the wireless router/access point are the same.
• If the network key, authentication method, and encryption method have been confirmed,
restart your wireless router/access point and the machine.
• If your wireless router/access point's Stealth Mode is on, you may need to disable it to
connect to the wireless network.
If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-07
The machine cannot detect a wireless router/access point that has WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
enabled.
Check the following points and try again:
• To check if your wireless router/access point supports WPS, look for the WPS symbol
displayed on the router/access point. For more information, see the documentation provided
with your wireless router/access point.
• To set up your wireless connection using WPS, you must configure both your machine and
the wireless router/access point. For more information, see the user's guide.
• If you do not know how to set up your wireless router/access point using WPS, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-08
Two or more wireless routers or access points that have WPS enabled are detected.
Check the following points and try again:
• Make sure that only one wireless router/access point within range has WPS enabled, and
then try to connect again.
• Try to connect again after a few minutes to avoid interference from other access points/
routers.
113
How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption method/Network Key)
of your WLAN access point/router:
1. The default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access point/router. Or
the manufacturer's name or model number of the WLAN access point/router may be used as the default
security settings.
2. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on how to find the
security settings.
• If the WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not automatically be
detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name.
• The Network Key may also be described as the Password, Security Key, or Encryption Key.
If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router or how to
change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the
manufacturer of your access point/router or ask your Internet provider or network administrator.
Related Information
• Print the WLAN Report
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
114
Home > Network > Network Features
Network Features
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
• Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
115
Home > Network > Network Features > Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Web Based Mgmt] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the option you want, and then press OK.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Based Mgmt].
2. Press to select the option you want.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
116
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based
Management
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web
Based Management:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the Proxy checkbox is selected, and then click Submit.
6. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings.
7. Enter the proxy server information.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
• Access Web Based Management
117
Home > Network > Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report
Print the Network Configuration Report
The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.
• The Node Name appears on the Network Configuration Report. The default Node Name is
"BRN123456abcdef" for a wired network or "BRW123456abcdef" for a wireless network (where
"123456abcdef" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)
• If the IP Address on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try
printing it again.
• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC
Address on the report, for example:
- IP address: 192.168.0.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
- Node name: BRN000ca0000499
- MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Network Config] option, and then press OK.
3. Press Go.
The machine prints the Network Configuration Report.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration].
2. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the Network Configuration Report.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• Access Web Based Management
• Error Messages
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Check Your Machine's Network Settings
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
118
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize the time used by the machine for
authentication with the SNTP time server. You can automatically or manually synchronize the machine's time with
the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided by the SNTP time server.
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
119
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure date and time to synchronize the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Verify the Time Zone settings.
Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For
example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
120
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronize the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by
the SNTP time server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SNTP checkbox to activate the settings.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
8. Next to the SNTP checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
9. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.
Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronization status.
SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC.
• AUTO
If you have a DHCP server on your network, the SNTP server will
obtain the address from that server automatically.
• STATIC
Type the address you want to use.
Primary SNTP Server Address
Secondary SNTP Server Address
Type the server's address (up to 64 characters).
The secondary SNTP server's address is used as a backup to the
primary SNTP server's address. If the primary server is unavailable,
the machine will contact the secondary SNTP server.
Primary SNTP Server Port
Secondary SNTP Server Port
Type the port number (1-65535).
The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary
SNTP server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will
contact the secondary SNTP port.
Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronization attempts
(1-168 hours).
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
121
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Models: HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network,
you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based
Management (web browser).
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. The machine can automatically negotiate the highest
supported network speed, for example: to achieve 1000BASE-T network speeds, all connecting
infrastructure, including network switches and cables must also support 1000BASE-T speeds. Otherwise
the machine will communicate at either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
122
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) > Configure the Gigabit
Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Models: HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Wired > Ethernet.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.
6. Click Submit.
7. To activate the settings, click Yes to restart your machine.
You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.
Related Information
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
• Print the Network Configuration Report
123
Home > Network > Network Features > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
You can use your machine's control panel to reset the machine's network settings to its default factory settings.
This resets all information, such as the password and IP address.
• This feature restores all network settings to the factory settings.
• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using Web Based Management.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Network Reset] option, and then press OK.
3. Follow the machine's instruction to reset the network settings.
The machine will restart.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset].
2. [Reboot OK?] will be displayed. Press [Yes] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Reset Functions
124
Home > Security
Security
• Before Using Network Security Features
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
• Use SSL/TLS
• Use SNMPv3
• Use IPsec
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• Use Active Directory Authentication
• Use LDAP Authentication
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Send an Email Securely
• Store Print Log to Network
• Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
• Use Global Network Detection Features
125
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These
network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent
unauthorized access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these
protocols is not secure.
Related Information
• Security
• Disable Unnecessary Protocols
126
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features > Disable Unnecessary Protocols
Disable Unnecessary Protocols
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Clear any unnecessary protocol checkboxes to disable them.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Before Using Network Security Features
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
127
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security
Configure Certificates for Device Security
You must configure a certificate to manage your networked machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must use Web
Based Management to configure a certificate.
• Supported Security Certificate Features
• How to Create and Install a Certificate
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate
Authority (CA)
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
• Manage Multiple Certificates
128
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Supported Security Certificate Features
Supported Security Certificate Features
Your machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management, authentication,
and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with the machine:
• SSL/TLS communication
• SSL communication for SMTP
• IEEE 802.1x authentication
• IPsec
Your machine supports the following:
• Pre-installed certificate
Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate.
The pre-installed self-signed certificate protects your communication up to a certain level. We recommend
using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organization for better security.
• Self-signed certificate
This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.
• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if
you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:
- When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.
- When importing a certificate and a private key.
• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate
To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate
from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.
• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator
first.
• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key
that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after
resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
129
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > How to Create and Install a Certificate
How to Create and Install a Certificate
There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA).
Option 1
Self-Signed Certificate
1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.
Option 2
Certificate from a CA
1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.
2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.
3. Install the certificate on your computer.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
130
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Self-signed Certificate
Create a Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate.
6. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date.
• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node
name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node
name is displayed by default.
• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than
the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
131
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from
a Certificate Authority (CA)
If you already have a certificate from an external trusted Certificate Authority (CA) , you can store the certificate
and private key on the machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate
from an external trusted CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and
install the returned certificate on your machine.
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
• Install a Certificate on Your Machine
132
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the
credentials contained within the certificate.
We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create CSR.
6. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).
• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside
world.
• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP
address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS
communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.
• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for
the certificate.
• The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality, and the State/Province
must be less than 64 bytes.
• The Country/Region should be a two-character ISO 3166 country code.
• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition
checkbox, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form
offered by a Certificate Authority.
10. Click Save.
133
• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.
• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, we
recommend using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If
you are creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we
recommend using User for the certificate template.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
134
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Machine
Install a Certificate on Your Machine
When you receive a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA), follow the steps below to install it on the print
server:
Only a certificate issued with your machine's Certificate Signing Request (CSR) can be installed on your
machine. When you want to create another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating the
new CSR. Create another CSR only after installing the certificate on the machine, otherwise the CSR created
before installing the new CSR will be invalid.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Install Certificate.
6. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit.
The certificate has been created and saved in your machine's memory successfully.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact
your network administrator.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
135
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.
• Import a Certificate and Private Key
• Export the Certificate and Private Key
136
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Import a Certificate and Private Key
Import a Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.
The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
137
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Export the Certificate and Private Key
Export the Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export shown with Certificate List.
6. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.
If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.
7. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit.
8. Click Save.
The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.
You can also import the certificate to your computer.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
138
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Import
a CA Certificate
Import a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import CA Certificate.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
140
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Export
a CA Certificate
Export a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
141
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Manage Multiple Certificates
Manage Multiple Certificates
The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed
on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view
certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.
Maximum Number of Certificates Stored on Brother Machine
Self-signed Certificate or
Certificate Issued by a CA
5
CA Certificate 6
We recommend storing fewer certificates than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.
When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.
This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.
• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, or IEEE 802.1x, you must select which certificate you are using.
• When you use SSL for SMTP communications, you do not have to choose the certificate. The
necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
142
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS
Introduction to SSL/TLS
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over
a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network,
so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.
SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such
as WPA keys and firewalls.
Related Information
• Use SSL/TLS
• Brief History of SSL/TLS
• Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
144
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS
Brief History of SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers
and servers. SSL is now used with additional applications, such as Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to
become a universal solution for online security. Its original design intentions are still being used today by many
online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit card numbers, customer records, etc.
SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
145
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by restricting
unauthorized users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's most important benefit is that it can be used to
print confidential data securely. For example, a Human Resource (HR) Department in a large company may be
printing wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read
by other network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a page of code and
not the actual wage slip.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
146
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
• Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
• Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
147
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Configure a
Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management before you use SSL/TLS
communication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click HTTP Server Settings.
6. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click Yes to restart your print server.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
148
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Access
Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
To manage your network machine securely, use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol.
• To use HTTPS protocol, HTTPS must be enabled on your machine. The HTTPS protocol is enabled by
default.
• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
149
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Install the
Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• The following steps are for Microsoft Edge. If you use another web browser, refer to your web browser's
documentation or online help for instructions on how to install certificates.
• Make sure you have created your self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
1. Right-click the Microsoft Edge icon, and then click Run as administrator.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If your connection is not private, click the Advanced button, and then continue to the web page.
4. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
5. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
6. Click Export.
7. To encrypt the output file, type a password in the Enter password field. If the Enter password field is blank,
your output file will not be encrypted.
8. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit.
9. Click the downloaded file to open.
10. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next.
11. Click Next.
12. If required, type a password, and then click Next.
13. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse….
14. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Finish.
17. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.
18. Click OK.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
150
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS > Print Documents Using
IPPS
Print Documents Using IPPS
To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the IPP checkbox is selected.
If the IPP checkbox is not selected, select the IPP checkbox, and then click Submit.
Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, type the password, go to the navigation
menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
6. Click HTTP Server Settings.
7. Select the HTTPS checkbox in the IPP area, and then click Submit.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorized access to the print server.
Related Information
• Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
152
Home > Security > Use SNMPv3 > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
The Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) provides user authentication and data
encryption to manage network devices securely.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Configure the SNMP settings.
Option Description
SNMP v1/v2c
read-write
access
The print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all of
your machine's applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not
authenticate the user and data will not be encrypted.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
and v1/v2c read-
only access
The print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only
access mode, some of your machine's applications that access the print
server do not work correctly since they authorize the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend
using the SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
The print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print
server securely, use this mode.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:
Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will
be restricted. To allow the use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use the SNMPv3
read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or SNMP v1/v2c read-
write access mode.
7. Click Submit.
If your machine displays the protocol setting options, select the options you want.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Use SNMPv3
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
154
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Introduction to IPsec
Introduction to IPsec
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent
data manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried
over a network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network
layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.
IPsec supports the following functions:
• IPsec transmissions
According to the IPsec setting conditions, a network-connected computer sends data to and receives data
from a specified device using IPsec. When devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are exchanged
using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the keys.
In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is
used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:
- A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.
- Your machine is configured for IPsec communication.
- The computer connected to your machine is configured for IPsec connections.
• IPsec settings
The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web
Based Management.
To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
156
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
The IPsec connection conditions comprise two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure up to 10
connection conditions.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Enable or disable IPsec.
Negotiation Mode Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1. IKE is a protocol that is
used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec.
In the Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is
high. In the Aggressive mode, the processing speed is faster than in
the Main mode, but the security is lower.
All Non-IPsec Traffic Select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.
When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec
Traffic. If you select Drop, Web Services cannot be used.
Broadcast/Multicast Bypass Select Enabled or Disabled.
Protocol Bypass Select the checkboxes for the option or options you want.
Rules Select the Enabled checkbox to activate the template. When you
select multiple checkboxes, the lower numbered checkboxes have
priority if the settings for the selected checkboxes conflict.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address
Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an
Address Template, click Add Template.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template
that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an IPsec
Template, click Add Template.
6. Click Submit.
If the machine must be restarted to activate the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.
If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm
your choices and click Submit again.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
157
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Address Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.
7. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Local IP Address • IP Address
Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6
Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom from the drop-down
list.
If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address
(IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address
range in the text boxes. If the starting and ending IP addresses
are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is
smaller than the starting address, an error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
Remote IP Address
• Any
If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled.
• IP Address
Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the first and last IP addresses for the IP address range. If
the first and last IP addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or
IPv6, or the last IP address is smaller than the first address, an
error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
159
Option Description
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
8. Click Submit.
When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to activate the
configuration.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
160
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration
fields differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings you select.
7. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
8. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
• IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
• IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
• Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
161
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The
setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP, AH, or AH+ESP.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the
completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol.
162
Option Description
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or
Certificates.
Pre-Shared Key When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the
Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security
configuration screen.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
163
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security.
The setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP.
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows
the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also
includes information regarding the encryption method and
encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
164
Option Description
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key,
Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2.
EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP.
By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key is used for user
authentication during each session.
The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or
EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method:
• Mode
Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode.
• Certificate
Select the certificate.
• User Name
Type the user name (up to 32 characters).
• Password
Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password
must be entered two times for confirmation.
Pre-Shared Key
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
165
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual
Settings for an IPsec Template
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
Select Manual.
Authentication Key (ESP, AH)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for
Encapsulating Security section.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Hash in the Encapsulating Security
section.
If the length of the specified authentication key is different than
the selected hash algorithm, an error will occur.
• MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes)
• SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
• SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes)
• SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
Code key (ESP)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and ESP is selected for Protocol in Encapsulating Security.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Encryption in the Encapsulating
Security section.
If the length of the specified code key is different than the
selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.
• DES: 64 bits (8 bytes)
• 3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes)
• AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
SPI
These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a
host has multiple Security Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec
communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the applicable SA
when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies
the SA, is included in the Authentication Header (AH) and
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.
167
Option Description
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected for Internet Key
Exchange (IKE).
Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)
Encapsulating Security • Protocol
Select ESP or AH.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation of the data (ensures the
completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
168
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
• Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)
• IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
169
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > What Is IEEE
802.1x Authentication?
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that limits access from unauthorized network devices. Your Brother machine
sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication server) through your access point or hub.
After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your machine can access the network.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
170
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > Configure IEEE
802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network
Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued
by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If
you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to
use.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the
server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm
whether a CA certificate import is necessary.
You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using the Wireless Setup Wizard from the control panel
(Wireless network).
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Do one of the following:
• For the wired network
Click Wired > Wired 802.1x Authentication.
• For the wireless network
Click Wireless > Wireless (Enterprise).
6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on
the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.
• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate installed (shown with
certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.
• If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method
from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA
certificate, imported to the machine in advance, issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
171
Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:
Option Description
No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.
CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the
CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name
1
value of the server certificate,
in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.
7. When finished with configuration, click Submit.
For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a
few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> status.
Option Description
Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.
Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.
Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
• Access Web Based Management
1 The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID.
Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID.
172
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > IEEE 802.1x
Authentication Methods
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
EAP-FAST
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been
developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key
algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-FAST/GTC
EAP-MD5 (Wired network)
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for
challenge-response authentication.
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user
ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by
Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client
and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication
between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-TTLS/CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate
authentication both at a client and an authentication server.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
173
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication
Use Active Directory Authentication
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
• Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
• Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management
• Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active
Directory Authentication)
174
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If Active Directory Authentication is enabled,
the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID
and password.
Active Directory Authentication offers the following feature:
Stores incoming print data
You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
175
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active Directory Authentication Using
Web Based Management
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must
configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Active Directory Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Active Directory Authentication.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
Active Directory Server
Address
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com)
of the Active Directory Server.
Active Directory Domain
Name
Type the Active Directory domain name.
Protocol & Authentication
Method
Select the protocol and authentication method.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option.
LDAP Server Port Type the port number to connect the Active Directory server via LDAP
(available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication
method).
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
176
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter
your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID.
2. Press [OK].
3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
177
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control
panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
LDAP Authentication offers the following feature:
Stores incoming print data
You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
179
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select LDAP Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the LDAP Authentication menu.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com)
of the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option to use LDAP over SSL/TLS.
LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number.
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory.
Attribute of Name (Search
Key)
Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
180
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID
and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK].
3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
181
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your machine.
• Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
• Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
• Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
182
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all
of the functions listed here.
You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management:
• Print
Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Brother iPrint&Scan, and Brother Mobile Connect.
If you register user login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use
the print function.
• Color Print
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Web Connect (supported models only)
• Page Limits (*)
• Page Counters
• Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
If you register user Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their
registered cards to the machine's NFC symbol.
Touchscreen LCD models:
When Secure Function Lock is enabled, the machine automatically enters Public Mode and some of the
machine's functions become restricted to authorized users only. To access the restricted machine functions,
press
, select your user name, and enter your password.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
183
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based
Management
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
9. In the Print and the other columns, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function
listed.
10. To configure the maximum page count, select the On checkbox in the Page Limits column, and then type the
maximum number in the Max. Pages field.
11. Click Submit.
12. Click the User List menu.
13. In the User List field, type the user name.
14. In the Password field, type a password.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on your model.
15. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain
models).
16. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
17. Click Submit.
You can also change the user list lockout settings in the Secure Function Lock menu.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
184
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.
Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode
settings.
Public Mode includes print jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the Public Mode row, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
185
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:
All Counter Reset
Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.
Export to CSV file
Click Export to CSV file, to export the current and last page counter including User List / Restricted
Functions information as a CSV file.
Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
Click the User List menu, and then type a user's Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your IC
card for authentication.
Last Counter Record
Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
186
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control
Panel
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
1. Touch the Near-Field Communication (NFC) symbol on the machine with a registered Integrated Circuit Card
(IC Card).
2. Press your login name.
3. Press [Register Card].
4. Touch a new IC Card to the NFC symbol.
5. Press [OK].
The new IC Card's number is registered to the machine.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
187
Home > Security > Send an Email Securely > Configure Email Sending Using Web Based Management
Configure Email Sending Using Web Based Management
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication,
or email sending using SSL/TLS.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the SMTP Client field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of SMTP Client is Enabled.
6. Configure the SMTP Client settings.
• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.
• If you do not know the SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service
Provider (ISP).
7. When finished, click Submit.
The Test Send E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
8. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
• Send an Email Securely
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
189
Home > Security > Send an Email Securely > Send an Email with User Authentication
Send an Email with User Authentication
Your machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user
authentication. This method prevents unauthorized users from accessing the email server.
You can use the SMTP-AUTH method for email notification and email reports.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.
Email Server Settings
You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.
For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
To enable SMTP server authentication, in the Web Based Management SMTP Client screen, under Server
Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH.
Related Information
• Send an Email Securely
190
Home > Security > Send an Email Securely > Send an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Send an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Your machine supports SSL/TLS communication methods. To use an email server that is using SSL/TLS
communication, you must configure the following settings.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.
Verify Server Certificate
Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate checkbox will be selected
automatically.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed
the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to
confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.
• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate checkbox.
Port Number
If you select SSL, or TLS, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To change the port number
manually, type the port number after you select SSL/TLS settings.
You must configure your machine's communication method to match the method used by your email server. For
details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.
In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:
SMTP
Port 587
Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH
SSL/TLS TLS
Related Information
• Send an Email Securely
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
191
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Store Print Log to Network Overview
Store Print Log to Network Overview
The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your machine to a network server
using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job, job name, user
name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs over TCP/IP,
allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.
The following print functions are recorded in the print log:
• Print jobs from your computer
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Web Connect Print (supported models only)
• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) for Authentication.
• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
193
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using
Web Based Management
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based
Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Print Log field, click On.
6. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Network Folder
Path
Type the destination folder where your print log will be stored on the CIFS server (for
example: \\ComputerName\SharedFolder).
File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).
File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the print log file type.
Time Source for
Log
Select the time source for the print log.
Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto,
Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or
individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.
NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers.
• Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.
• Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.
• NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.
For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure the
Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS
server.
Username Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).
If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).
Kerberos Server
Address (if
needed)
Type the Key Distribution Center (KDC) host address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example:
192.168.56.189).
194
Option Description
Error Detection
Setting
Choose what action should be taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server
due to a network error.
7. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.
You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.
8. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
9. The machine will test your settings.
10. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
195
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection
Setting
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the
server due to a network error.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.
Option Description
Cancel
Print
If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are canceled when the print log cannot be
stored to the server.
Ignore Log
& Print
If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the
print log cannot be stored to the server.
When the Store Print Log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows:
a. If the log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the number of printed pages will not be
recorded.
b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of
the job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the
log.
6. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
7. The machine will test your settings.
8. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
196
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Before turning on the machine's Setting Lock, write down and save your password. If you forget the password,
you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother Customer
Service.
• Setting Lock Overview
198
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview
Setting Lock Overview
Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorized access to machine settings.
When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.
• Set the Setting Lock Password
• Change the Setting Lock Password
• Turn On Setting Lock
199
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Set the
Setting Lock Password
Set the Setting Lock Password
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK.
3. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK.
4. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock].
2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
3. Press [OK].
4. When the LCD displays [Verify], re-enter the password.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
200
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Change
the Setting Lock Password
Change the Setting Lock Password
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Set Password] option, and then press OK.
4. Enter the current four-digit password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK.
5. Enter a new four-digit password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK.
6. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the new password.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set
Password].
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
4. Enter a new four-digit password.
5. Press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify], re-enter the new password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
201
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Turn On
Setting Lock
Turn On Setting Lock
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK.
3. Press OK when the LCD displays [On].
4. Enter the current four-digit password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock
Off⇒On].
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
202
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features
Use Global Network Detection Features
When you use your machine on a private network, use the Global Network Detection feature to avoid a risk from
unexpected attacks from the global network.
• Enable Global IP Address Detection
• Block Communications from the Global Network
203
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Enable Global IP Address Detection
Enable Global IP Address Detection
Use this feature to check your machine's IP address. When your machine is assigned to a global IP address, an
alert is displayed on the machine.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Global Detect] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Allow Detect] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select [On], and then press OK.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Allow Detect] >
[On].
2. Press .
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
204
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Block Communications from the Global
Network
Block Communications from the Global Network
When you enable this feature, it limits receiving jobs from devices with global IP addresses
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Global Detect] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Reject Access] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select [On], and then press OK.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Reject Access] >
[On].
2. Press
.
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
205
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview
Brother Web Connect Overview
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your
Brother machine can download and print images that are already uploaded to these services.
1. Printing
2. Photos, images, documents, and other files
3. Web Service
To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the
Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection.
For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you
are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator.
A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet
connection, and the Internet.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
208
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview > Configure the
Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy
Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On].
2. Press the proxy server information, and then enter the option that you want to set.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press
.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect Overview
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
209
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine:
To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not
already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
Google Drive
™
An online document storage, editing, sharing, and file synchronization service.
URL:
drive.google.com
Evernote
®
An online file storage and management service.
URL: www.evernote.com
Dropbox
An online file storage, sharing, and synchronization service.
URL: www.dropbox.com
OneDrive
An online file storage, sharing, and managing service.
URL:
onedrive.live.com
Box
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.box.com
OneNote
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL:
www.onenote.com
SharePoint Online
An online content storage, sharing, and managing service.
For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website.
The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature:
Accessible Services
Google Drive
™
Evernote
®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
Download and print images
1
JPEG
PDF
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
1
DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images.
210
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect
Set Up Brother Web Connect
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
• Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
• Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
• Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
• Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
212
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web
Connect Setup Overview
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure:
Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use.
Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there
is no need to create an additional account.)
1. User registration
2. Web Service
3. Obtain account
Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID.
1. Enter account information
2. Brother Web Connect application page
3. Obtain temporary ID
Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to
use.
Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it
to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one.
1. Enter temporary ID
2. Web Service
213
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account
for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web
Connect
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If
you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web
Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
When you have created an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect
access.
Related Information
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
215
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother
Web Connect Access
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access
using a computer that has the Brother Software installed.
1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website:
Option Description
Windows Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name
(if not already selected).
Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect.
You can also access the website directly:
Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
Mac Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
The Brother Web Connect page launches.
2. Select the service you want to use.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access.
When using SharePoint Online, follow the on-screen instructions to register a document library.
When finished, your temporary ID appears.
4. Make a note of your temporary ID as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID is
valid for 24 hours.
5. Close the web browser.
Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use
your machine to access the web service you want to use.
216
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an
Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use
Brother Web Connect to access the service you want.
• You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine.
• Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Press [Functions] > [Web].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
2. If the information regarding license agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen
instructions.
3. Press a or b to display the service with which you want to register.
4. Press the service name.
5. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK].
6. Press [Register/Delete].
7. Press [Register Account].
The machine prompts you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web Connect
access.
8. Press [OK].
9. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD.
10. Press [OK].
An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID
you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID
correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID.
The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want to be displayed on the LCD.
11. Press [OK].
12. Enter the name using the LCD.
13. Press [OK].
14. Do one of the following:
• To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes]. (A PIN prevents unauthorized access to the account.) Enter a
four-digit number, and then press [OK].
• If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No].
15. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct.
16. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered.
17. Press [OK].
18. Press .
Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service.
218
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed.
Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your
machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents.
If you are a restricted user for Brother Web Connect due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available
for certain models), you cannot download the data.
The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature also applies to print jobs sent using Brother Web Connect.
For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea:
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Using Web Services
220
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services
Download and Print Using Web Services
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Functions] > [Web].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
2. Press a or b to display the service that hosts the document you want to download and print. Press the service
name.
3. To log on to the service, press a or b to display your account name, and then press it. If the PIN entry screen
appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK].
4. Press a or b to display the folder you want, and then press it. Some services do not require documents to be
saved in folders. For documents not saved in folders, select [See Unsorted Files] to select documents.
Other users’ documents cannot be downloaded if they are not saved in a folder.
5. Select the documents you want to print and then press [OK].
6. When finished, press [OK].
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
221
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > AirPrint Overview
AirPrint Overview
AirPrint is a printing solution for Apple operating systems that allows you
to wirelessly print photos, email, web pages, and documents from your
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac computer without the need to install a
driver.
For more information, visit Apple’s website.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Problems
223
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before printing using macOS, add your machine to the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
The Add Printer screen appears.
4. Do one of the following:
• macOS v12
Select your machine, and then select your model's name from the Use pop-up menu.
• macOS v11
Select your machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
5. Click Add.
Related Information
• AirPrint
224
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Tap
or .
5. Tap Print.
6. Make sure your machine is selected.
7. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, tap Printer.
A list of available machines appears.
8. Tap your machine's name in the list.
9. Select the options you want, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
10. Tap Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
226
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing,
make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
5. Make sure your machine is selected. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, click the Printer pop-
up menu, and then select your machine.
6. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
7. Click Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
227
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria
™
Print Service
Mopria
™
Print Service
Mopria
™
Print Service is a print feature on Android
™
mobile devices developed
by the Mopria Alliance
™
. With this service, you can connect to the same network
as your machine and print without additional setup.
1
2
3
1. Android
™
Mobile Device
2. Wi-Fi
®
Connection
3. Your Machine
You must download the Mopria
™
Print Service from Google Play
™
and install it on your Android
™
device. Before
using this Mopria
™
feature, make sure you enable it on your mobile device.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
228
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Mobile Connect
Brother Mobile Connect
Use Brother Mobile Connect to print from your mobile device.
• For Android
™
devices:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your Android
™
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from Google Play
™
.
• For all iOS or iPadOS supported devices including iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your iOS or iPadOS
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from the App Store.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
Related Topics:
• Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
229
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Register an External IC Card Reader
Register an External IC Card Reader
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your
machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > External Card Reader.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Enter the necessary information.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
230
Home > Brother iPrint&Scan > Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Use Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows and Mac to print from your computer.
The following screen shows an example of Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows. The actual screen may differ
depending on the version of the application.
• For Windows
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads to download the latest application.
• For Mac
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.
If prompted, install the driver and software necessary to use your machine. Download the installer from
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Brother iPrint&Scan
Related Topics:
• Brother Mobile Connect
232
Home > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your machine. You can correct most
problems yourself.
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within
that country.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com.
First, check the following:
• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is
set up on both the machine and your computer.
• Error and maintenance messages
If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information.
Related Information
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
• Paper Jams
• Printing Problems
• Improve the Print Quality
• Network Problems
• AirPrint Problems
• Other Problems
• Check the Machine Information
• Reset Functions
233
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages
Error and Maintenance Messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this
happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.
The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.
Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit
support.brother.com/faqs.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Error Message
Cause Action
2-sided Disabled
The back cover of the machine is
not closed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it
locks in the closed position.
The 2-sided tray is not installed
completely.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
Access Denied
The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Belt End Soon
The belt unit is near the end of its
life.
Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays
Replace Belt.
Calibrate
Calibration failed.
• Press and hold down to turn off the
machine. Wait a few seconds, and then
turn it on again. Perform the color
calibration again using the control panel.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Cannot Detect
Your machine cannot detect the
toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it
back into the drum unit again. Re-install the
toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back
in the machine.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Cannot Print ##
The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
wait a few minutes, and then turn it on
again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Contact Brother Customer Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in
USA)
www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit:
www.brother-usa.com/support.
234
Error Message Cause Action
Cartridge Error
The toner cartridge is not installed
correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it
back into the drum unit again. Re-install the
toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back
in the machine.
If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Condensation
Condensation may have formed
inside the machine after a room
temperature change.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30
minutes with the top cover in the open
position. Then turn off the machine and close
the cover. Turn it on again.
Cooling Down
The temperature inside the
machine is too hot. The machine
pauses its current print job and
goes into Cooling Down mode.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling
down. Make sure all vents on the machine are
clear of obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will
resume printing.
Cover is Open
The top cover is not completely
closed.
Open and then firmly close the top cover of the
machine.
The fuser cover is not completely
closed.
Close the fuser cover located under the back
cover of the machine.
Drum !
The corona wire on the drum unit
must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Corona
Wires.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
Drum End Soon
The drum unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD
displays Replace Drum.
Drum Stop
It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
Jam 2-sided
The paper is jammed in the 2-
sided tray or inside the back
cover.
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back
cover to pull out all jammed paper.
Jam Inside
The paper is jammed inside the
machine.
Open the top cover, remove the toner cartridge
and drum unit assemblies, and gently remove
the jammed paper. Reinstall the toner
cartridge and drum unit assemblies into the
machine. Close the top cover.
Jam Manual Feed
The paper is jammed in the
manual feed slot of the machine.
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and
around the manual feed slot. Reload the paper
into the manual feed slot, and then press Go.
Jam Rear
The paper is jammed in the back
of the machine.
Open the fuser cover and gently remove the
jammed paper. Close the fuser cover.
Jam Tray 1
The paper is jammed in the
indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray and gently remove all
jammed paper.
235
Error Message Cause Action
Limit Exceeded
The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Manual Feed
Manual was selected as the paper
source in the printer driver, but
there is no paper in the manual
feed slot.
Place paper in the manual feed slot.
Media Mismatch
The media type specified in the
printer driver differs from the
paper type specified in the
machine's menu.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray, and
then select the correct media type in the Paper
Type setting on the machine.
No Belt Unit
The belt unit is not installed or not
installed correctly.
Reinstall the belt unit.
No Drum Unit
The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
No Paper T1
The machine failed to feed paper
from the indicated paper tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on
the LCD. Make sure the paper guides are
set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set
to the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Toner
The toner cartridge is not installed
or not installed correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the
drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge
back into the drum unit. Reinstall the toner
cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the
machine. If the problem continues, replace the
toner cartridge.
No Tray T1
The paper tray is not installed or
not installed correctly.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
No Waste Toner
The waste toner box is not
installed or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
Out of Memory
The machine’s memory is full. Press and hold Go for about two seconds and
reduce the print resolution.
Print Data Full
The machine’s memory is full. Press Cancel and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
Registration
Registration failed. • If the error continues, press and hold down
to turn off the machine.
Wait a few seconds, and then turn on the
machine again.
Perform the color registration using the
control panel.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Replace Belt
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Belt
Unit.
236
Error Message Cause Action
Replace Drum
It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit for the color indicated
on the LCD.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
If this message is displayed even
after replacing the drum unit with
new one, the drum unit counter
was not reset.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
Replace Toner
The toner cartridge is at the end of
its life. The machine stops all print
operations.
Replace the toner cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Replace WT Box
It is time to replace the waste
toner box.
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Waste
Toner Box.
Self-Diagnostic
The temperature of the fuser unit
does not rise to a specified
temperature within the specified
time.
Press and hold to turn off the machine,
wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.
Leave the machine idle for 15 minutes with the
power on.
The fuser unit is too hot.
Size Error
The paper size defined in the
printer driver is not supported by
the defined tray.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined
tray.
Size Error DX
The paper size specified in the
machine's paper size setting is not
available for automatic 2-sided
printing.
Press Go.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided
printing.
Paper sizes available for automatic 2-sided
printing are Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India
Legal and Folio.
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size and is not available
for automatic 2-sided printing.
Size Mismatch
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the size of paper for the tray. Press Go.
Toner Error
One or more toner cartridges are
not installed or not installed
correctly.
Pull out the drum units. Remove all the toner
cartridges, and then put them back into the
drum units.
Toner Low: BK
Toner Low: C
Toner Low: M
Toner Low: Y
(BK=Black, C=Cyan,
M=Magenta, Y=Yellow.)
If the LCD displays this message,
you can still print. The toner
cartridge is near the end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD
displays Replace Toner.
WT Box End Soon
The waste toner box is almost full. Order a new waste toner box before the LCD
displays Replace WT Box.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Error Message
Cause Action
2-sided Disabled
The back cover of the machine is
not closed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it
locks in the closed position.
The 2-sided tray is not installed
completely.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
237
Error Message Cause Action
Access Denied
The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Calibration
Calibration failed.
• Press and hold down to turn off the
machine. Wait a few seconds, and then
turn it on again. Perform the color
calibration again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Cannot Detect
Your machine cannot detect the
toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it
back into the drum unit again. Re-install the
toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back
in the machine.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Cannot Print ##
The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
wait a few minutes, and then turn it on
again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Contact Brother Customer Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in
USA)
www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit:
www.brother-usa.com/support.
Cartridge Error
The toner cartridge is not installed
correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it
back into the drum unit again. Install the toner
cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the
machine.
If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Condensation
Condensation may have formed
inside the machine after a room
temperature change.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30
minutes with the top cover in the open
position. Then turn off the machine and close
the cover. Turn it on again.
Cooling Down
The temperature inside the
machine is too high. The machine
pauses its current print job and
goes into cooling down mode.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling
down. Make sure all vents on the machine are
clear of obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will
resume printing.
Cover is Open
The top cover is not completely
closed.
Open and then firmly close the top cover of the
machine.
The fuser cover is not completely
closed.
Close the fuser cover located under the back
cover of the machine.
238
Error Message Cause Action
Drum !
The corona wire on the drum unit
must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Corona
Wires.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
Drum Stop
It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
Jam 2-sided
The paper is jammed in the 2-
sided tray or inside the back
cover.
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back
cover to pull out all jammed paper.
Jam Inside
The paper is jammed inside the
machine.
Open the top cover, remove the toner cartridge
and drum unit assemblies, and gently remove
the jammed paper. Reinstall the toner
cartridge and drum unit assemblies into the
machine. Close the top cover.
Jam Manual Feed
The paper is jammed in the
manual feed slot of the machine.
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and
around the manual feed slot. Reload the paper
into the manual feed slot, and then press
Retry.
Jam MP Tray
The paper is jammed in the MP
tray.
Remove all jammed paper from in and around
the MP tray. Press Retry.
Jam Rear
The paper is jammed in the back
of the machine.
Open the fuser cover and gently remove the
jammed paper. Close the fuser cover. If the
error message remains, press Retry.
Jam Tray1
Jam Tray2
The paper is jammed in the
indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray and gently remove all
jammed paper as shown in the animation on
the LCD.
Limit Exceeded
The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Manual Feed
Manual was selected as the paper
source in the printer driver, but
there is no paper in the manual
feed slot.
Place paper in the manual feed slot.
Media Type Mismatch
The media type specified in the
printer driver differs from the
paper type specified in the
machine's menu.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD, and then select the
correct media type in the Paper Type setting
on the machine.
No Belt Unit
The belt unit is not installed or not
installed correctly.
Reinstall the belt unit.
No Drum Unit
The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
No HUB Support
A USB hub device is connected to
the USB host connector.
Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB
host connector.
239
Error Message Cause Action
No Paper MP Tray
The MP tray is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in the
MP tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the MP tray, remove it and
load it again. Make sure the paper guides
are set to the correct size.
No Paper Tray1
No Paper Tray2
The machine failed to feed paper
from the indicated paper tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on
the LCD. Make sure the paper guides are
set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set
to the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Toner
The toner cartridge is not installed
or not installed correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the
drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge
back into the drum unit. Reinstall the toner
cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the
machine. If the problem continues, replace the
toner cartridge.
No Tray1
No Tray2
The paper tray is not installed or
not installed correctly.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
No Waste Toner
The waste toner box is not
installed or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
Out of Memory
The machine’s memory is full.
Press and reduce the print resolution.
Print Data Full
The machine’s memory is full.
Press and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
Registration
Registration failed.
• Press and hold down to turn off the
machine. Wait a few seconds, and then
turn it on again. Perform the color
registration again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother
dealer.
Replace Toner
The toner cartridge is at the end of
its life. The machine stops all print
operations.
Replace the toner cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Replace WT Box
It is time to replace the waste
toner box.
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Waste
Toner Box.
Screen Init. Fail
The touchscreen was pressed
before the power on initialization
was completed.
Make sure nothing is touching the
touchscreen.
Debris may be stuck between the
lower part of the touchscreen and
its frame.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower
part of the touchscreen and its frame and slide
it back and forth to push out any debris.
240
Error Message Cause Action
Self-Diagnostic
The temperature of the fuser unit
does not rise to a specified
temperature within the specified
time.
Press and hold to turn off the machine,
wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.
Leave the machine idle for 15 minutes with the
power on.
The fuser unit is too hot.
Size Error
The paper size defined in the
printer driver is not supported by
the defined tray.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined
tray.
Size Error 2-sided
The paper size specified in the
machine's paper size setting is not
available for automatic 2-sided
printing.
Press (if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided
printing.
Paper sizes available for automatic 2-sided
printing are Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India
Legal and Folio.
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size and is not available
for automatic 2-sided printing.
Size Mismatch
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and
set the size of paper for the tray. Press Retry.
Supplies
Belt End Soon
The belt unit is near the end of its
life.
Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays
Replace Belt.
Supplies
Drum End Soon
The drum unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD
displays Replace Drum.
Supplies
Replace Belt
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Belt
Unit.
Supplies
Replace Drum
It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit for the color indicated
on the LCD.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
If this message is displayed even
after replacing the drum unit with
new one, the drum unit counter
was not reset.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum
Unit.
Supplies
Toner Low: X
(X indicates the toner cartridge
or drum unit color that is near
the end of its life. BK=Black,
C=Cyan, M=Magenta,
Y=Yellow.)
If the LCD displays this message,
you can still print. The toner
cartridge is near the end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD
displays Replace Toner.
Supplies
WT Box End Soon
The waste toner box is almost full. Order a new waste toner box before the LCD
displays Replace WT Box.
Toner Error
One or more toner cartridges are
not installed or not installed
correctly.
Pull out the drum units. Remove all the toner
cartridges, and then put them back into the
drum units.
Too Many Trays
The number of installed Optional
Trays exceeds the maximum
number.
Reduce the number of Optional Trays.
Unusable Device
An unsupported USB device has
been connected to the USB host
connector.
Unplug the device from the USB host
connector.
241
Error Message Cause Action
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn
the power off and back
on again.
A defective USB device or a high
power consumption USB device
has been connected to the USB
direct interface.
• Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
and then turn it on again.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Clean the Corona Wires
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Replace the Waste Toner Box
242
Home > Troubleshooting > Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Your machine displays an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are shown in the
table.
You can correct most errors yourself. If, after reading this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting
tips at support.brother.com/faqs.
Connection Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Connection Error 02
Network connection failed.
Verify that the network
connection is good.
The machine is not connected to a
network.
• Make sure the eligible IP address
is assigned to your machine.
• Check your access point/router is
active and the Internet connection
is established.
• Make sure the wireless router/
access point is on.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
Connection Error 03
Connection failed to server.
Check network settings.
• Network or server settings are
incorrect.
• There is a problem with the
network or server.
• Confirm that network settings are
correct, or wait and try again later.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
See Related Information: Configure
Date and Time Using Web Based
Management.
Connection Error 07
Connection failed to server.
Wrong Date & Time.
Date and time settings are incorrect. Set the date and time correctly. Note
that if the machine's power cord is
disconnected, the date and time
settings may have reset to factory
settings.
Authentication Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Authentication Error 01
Incorrect PIN code. Enter
PIN correctly.
The PIN you entered to access the
account is incorrect. The PIN is the
four-digit number that was entered
when registering the account to the
machine.
Enter the correct PIN.
Authentication Error 02
Incorrect or expired ID, or
this temporary ID is already
used. Enter correctly or
reissue temporary ID.
Temporary ID is valid for 24
hours after it is issued.
The temporary ID that was entered is
incorrect.
Enter the correct temporary ID.
The temporary ID that was entered
has expired. A temporary ID is valid
for 24 hours.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again and receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
243
Error Messages Cause Action
Authentication Error 03
Display name has already
been registered. Enter
another display name.
The name you entered as the display
name has already been registered to
another service user.
Enter a different display name.
Server Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Server Error 01
Authentication failed. Do
the following: 1. Go to
http://bwc.brother.com to
get a new temporary ID. 2.
Press OK and enter your new
temporary ID in the next
screen.
The machine's authentication
information (needed to access the
service) has expired or is invalid.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again to receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
Server Error 13
Service temporarily
unavailable. Try again
later.
There is a problem with the service
and it cannot be used now.
Wait and try again. If you get the
message again, access the service
from a computer to confirm if it is
unavailable.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
244
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray, fan and straighten the stack when you are adding new
paper. This helps prevent paper jams.
• Clear Paper Jams
• Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
• Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
• Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
• Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
245
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Clear Paper Jams
Clear Paper Jams
If paper is jammed or multiple sheets of paper are fed together frequently, do the following:
• Clean the paper pick-up rollers and the separator pad of paper trays.
See Related Information: Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers.
• Load paper correctly in the tray.
See Related Information: Load Paper.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your machine.
See Related Information: Paper Settings.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your computer.
See Related Information: Print a Document (Windows).
See Related Information: Print Using AirPrint.
• Use the recommended paper.
See Related Information: Using Special Paper.
See Related Information: Recommended Print Media.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
Related Topics:
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
• Print Using AirPrint
• Load Paper
• Paper Settings
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Using Special Paper
• Recommended Print Media
246
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Related Models: HL-L3295CDW
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow
these steps:
1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.
2. Slowly remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1) on both
sides of the tray.
1
5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
247
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's manual feed
slot, follow these steps:
1. Gently remove any paper that is jammed in or around the manual feed slot.
2. Reload the paper into the manual feed slot.
3. Do one of the following:
• HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Press Go to resume printing.
• HL-L3280CDW
Press [Retry] to resume printing.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
248
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these
steps:
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.
Pulling the jammed paper downward using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.
3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Load paper in
the paper tray.
249
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back of the machine (Jam
Rear), do the following:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the back cover.
3. Pull the green tabs at the left and right sides toward you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
If the gray envelope levers inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers
to the original position before pulling the green tabs down.
251
4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.
5. Close the fuser cover.
If you print on envelopes, pull down the gray envelope levers to the envelope position again before printing.
6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
252
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these
steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
253
4. Gently remove the jammed paper slowly.
5. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
6. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
254
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow
these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2‑sided tray completely out of the machine.
4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2‑sided tray.
5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity.
255
6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
7. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.
8. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
9. Put the 2-sided tray firmly back in the rear of the machine.
10. Put the paper tray firmly back in the front of the machine.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
256
Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems
Printing Problems
If, after reading the information in this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at
support.brother.com/faqs.
Difficulties Suggestions
No printout Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.
If the machine is in Power Off mode, press
, and then
send the print data again.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed
and selected.
Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's
control panel displays an error.
Check that the machine is online:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers. Right-click your model's icon,
and click See what’s printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not
selected.
• Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server
2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers. Right-click your model's
name. Click See what’s printing. If printer driver
options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer
in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s
printing. If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make
sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel > Hardware > View devices and
printers. Right-click your model's name. Click See
what's printing. If printer driver options appear, select
your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and
make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected.
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.
Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
The headers or footers appear when the document
displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is
printed.
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the
page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your
document to allow for this.
257
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your
application's Print window.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly,
then some pages have missing text.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the
computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable
correctly.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper
even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the
machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You
must select Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, or India
Legal paper. Supported paper weight is 16 to 28 lb (60 to
105 g/m²).
Print speed is too slow. Reduce the resolution in the printer driver.
If you have enabled Quiet Mode, disable it in the printer
driver or the machine's menu.
When printing continuously, the printing speed may be
automatically reduced to lower the temperature inside the
machine.
The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.
If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful
to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back
in the paper tray.
Fan the stack of paper well and place it back to the paper
tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then
try again.
(For models with MP Tray) Make sure MP Tray is not
selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
(For models with Manual Feed Slot) Make sure Manual is
not selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.
(For models with MP Tray)
Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray.
Make sure MP Tray is selected as the Paper Source in
the printer driver.
The machine does not feed paper from the Manual feed
slot.
(For models with Manual Feed Slot)
Use both hands to push one sheet of paper firmly into the
manual feed slot until the top edge of the paper presses
against the paper feed rollers. Continue pressing the
paper against the rollers until the machine grabs the
paper and pulls it in further.
Put only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
Make sure Manual is selected as Paper Source in the
printer driver.
The machine does not feed envelopes. (For models with Manual Feed Slot)Load one envelope at
a time in the manual feed slot. Your application must be
set to print the envelope size you are using. This is
usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu
of your application.
258
Difficulties Suggestions
(For models with MP Tray)Load envelopes in the MP tray.
Your application must be set to print the envelope size
you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or
Document Setup menu of your application.
Print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects. Adjust the print position using the Print Position setting for
each paper tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Cancel a Print Job
259
Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality
Improve the Print Quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not
the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test
page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the
recommendations in the table.
1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that
meets our specifications. See Related Information: Recommended Print Media.
2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies are installed correctly.
Examples of poor print quality
Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Printed pages are compressed, horizontal stripes appear,
or characters in the top, bottom, left, or right margins are
cut off
Adjust the print margins in your document's application
and reprint the job.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colors are light or faint on the whole page
• Use the machine's LCD to perform calibration.See
Related Information: Correct Color Printing.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
See Related Information: Reduce Toner Consumption.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry,
soft lint-free cloth.
See Related Information: Clean the LED Heads.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical white streaks or bands appear on the page
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry,
soft lint-free cloth.
• Make sure foreign material such as a torn piece of
paper, sticky notes, or dust is not inside the machine
or around the toner cartridge and drum unit
assemblies.
260
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical colored streaks or bands appear on the page
• Clean all four corona wires (one for each color) inside
the drum unit by sliding the green tab. Make sure the
green tab of the corona wire is in the home position
(1).
1
• Replace the toner cartridge that matches the color of
the streak or band.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs and view the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page for your model.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Horizontal colored lines appear on the page
• Identify the color causing the problem and replace the
toner cartridge that matches the color of the line.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
White spots
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Blank page or some missing colors
• Identify the color causing the problem and install a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
261
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colored spots at 3.0 in. (75 mm)
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Colored spots at 1.1 in. (29 mm)
Identify the color causing the problem and install a new
toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner scatter or toner stain
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
The color of your printouts is not what you expected
• To improve the color density, perform the color
correction using the LCD.
• To adjust the print position of colors for sharper edges,
perform the color registration using the LCD.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
• If the print quality of the black portion is not what you
expected, select the Enhance Black Printing
checkbox in the printer driver.
• Clear the Improve Gray Color checkbox in the printer
driver.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
262
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Color offset
• Make sure the machine is on a solid level surface.
• Perform the color correction using the LCD.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
• Install a new belt unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Belt Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Uneven color density across the page
• Perform the color correction using the LCD.
• Clear the Improve Gray Color checkbox in the printer
driver.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
A
B
C
D
E
W X Y Z
Missing thin lines in images
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
• Change the print resolution.
• If you use a Windows printer driver, select Improve
Pattern Printing in Print Setting of the Basic tab.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Wrinkled printout
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Make sure the back cover is closed correctly.
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Ghosting images
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
low humidity and low temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Select Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer
driver.
If this selection does not provide enough
improvement, change the printer driver setting in
263
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
Toner smears easily Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an
envelope, select Env. Thick in the media type setting.
Curled or wavy image
• Select Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver.
If the problem is not solved, select Plain Paper in the
media type setting.
• If you are printing an envelope, select Env. Thin in the
Media Type Setting of the printer driver.
• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may
have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the
stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper
stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Store the paper where it will not be exposed to high
temperatures and high humidity.
• Open the back cover (Face up output tray) to let the
printed paper exit onto the Face up output tray.
Envelope creases
• Make sure the envelope levers inside the back cover
are pulled down to the envelope position when you
print envelopes.
NOTE
When you have finished printing, open the back
cover and reset the two gray levers back to
their original position (1) by lifting them up until
they stop.
1
1
• (For models with MP Tray) If creases occur with the
envelope levers in the envelope position, print with the
back cover open and feed one envelope at a time
from the MP tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Correct Color Printing
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Reduce Toner Consumption
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Clean the Drum Unit
• Clean the LED Heads
• Test Print
• Recommended Print Media
264
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages
Error Messages
The most common error messages are shown in the table.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Error Messages
Cause Action
Authentication Error,
contact your administrator.
Your authentication setting for the
Store Print Log to Network feature is
not correct.
• Make sure the Username and
Password in Authentication
Setting are correct. If the
username is part of a domain,
enter the username in one of the
following styles: user@domain or
domain\user.
• Make sure the SNTP time server
settings are configured correctly
so the time matches the time used
for authentication by Kerberos or
NTLMv2.
Connection Error
Other devices are trying to connect to
the Wi-Fi Direct network at the same
time.
Make sure there are no other devices
trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct
network, and then try to configure the
Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
Connection Fail
The Brother machine and your mobile
device cannot communicate during
the Wi-Fi Direct network
configuration.
• Move the mobile device closer to
your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and
the mobile device to an
obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of
WPS, make sure you have
entered the correct PIN.
File Access Error, contact
your administrator.
The Brother machine cannot access
the destination folder for the Store
Print Log to Network feature.
• Make sure the destination folder
name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is
write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not
locked. If it is, contact your
network administrator.
Log Access Error
In Web Based Management, you
have selected the Cancel Print
option in the Error Detection Setting
section of the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Wait for about 30 seconds until this
message disappears from the LCD.
Cannot Connect
Maximum limit of connected
devices has been reached.
Four mobile devices are already
connected to the Wi-Fi Direct network
when the Brother machine is the
Group Owner.
After the current connection between
your Brother machine and another
mobile device has shut down, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings
again. You can confirm the
connection status by printing the
Network Configuration Report.
See Related Information: Print the
Network Configuration Report.
No Device
When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, the Brother machine cannot
find your mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and
mobile device are in the Wi-Fi
Direct mode.
266
Error Messages Cause Action
• Move the mobile device closer to
your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and
the mobile device to an
obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the
Wi-Fi Direct network, make sure
you have entered the correct
password.
• If your mobile device has a
configuration page for obtaining an
IP address, make sure your
mobile device's IP address has
been configured via DHCP.
Server Timeout, contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot connect
to the server for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
• Make sure your server address is
correct.
• Make sure your server is
connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is
connected to the network.
Wrong Date & Time, contact
your administrator.
The Brother machine does not obtain
the time from the SNTP time server.
Make sure the settings to access the
SNTP time server are configured
correctly in Web Based Management.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Error Messages
Cause Action
Authentication
error, contact
your
administrator.
Your authentication setting for
the Store Print Log to Network
feature is not correct.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is
part of a domain, enter the username in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are
configured correctly so the time matches the time used
for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2.
Check User ID and
Password.
The Kerberos Authentication
error.
Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a
password for the Kerberos server. For more information
on the Kerberos server settings, contact your network
administrator.
The DNS server configuration
is not correct.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the DNS server settings.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Kerberos server.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the Kerberos server settings.
Connection Error
Other devices are trying to
connect to the Wi-Fi Direct
network at the same time.
Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to
the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the Wi-
Fi Direct settings again.
Connection Failed
The Brother machine and your
mobile device cannot
communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure
you have entered the correct PIN.
File access error,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
access the destination folder
for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
• Make sure the destination folder name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact
your network administrator.
267
Error Messages Cause Action
Log Access Error
In Web Based Management,
you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting section of
the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears
from the LCD.
No Device
When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother
machine cannot find your
mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, make sure you have entered the correct
password.
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for
obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile
device's IP address has been configured via DHCP.
Server timeout,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network
feature.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Server Timeout
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the LDAP server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Active Directory
server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The maximum number
of devices are
already connected
using Wi-Fi
Direct. Press
[OK].
Four mobile devices are
already connected to the Wi-Fi
Direct network when the
Brother machine is the Group
Owner.
After the current connection between your Brother
machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm
the connection status by printing the Network
Configuration Report.
See Related Information: Print the Network Configuration
Report.
Wrong Date & Time,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine does not
obtain the time from the SNTP
time server.
Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server
are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
Internal Error
The Brother machine's LDAP
protocol is disabled.
Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the
necessary protocol setting in Web Based Management.
The Brother machine's CIFS
protocol is disabled.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
268
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct
IP address and Subnet Mask.
Make sure your machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page.
The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair
Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >
Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the
IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.
If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection
Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
269
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If you think there is a problem with your machine's network environment, check the following topics. You can
correct most problems yourself.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com/faqs.
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
271
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network > I
Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then, try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to
resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Cause
Action Interface
Your security settings (SSID/
Network Key) are not
correct.
Confirm the security settings using Wireless Setup Helper
(Windows). For more information and to download the utility, go to
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Select and confirm that you are using the correct security settings.
- See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access
point/router for information on how to find the security settings.
- The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless LAN
access point/router may be used as the default security settings.
- Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your Internet
provider, or network administrator.
Wireless
Your Brother machine's MAC
address is not allowed.
Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the
filter.
You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's control
panel.
Wireless
Your wireless LAN access
point/router is in Stealth
mode (not broadcasting the
SSID).
• Enter the correct SSID or Network Key manually.
• Check the SSID or the Network Key in the instructions supplied
with your wireless LAN access point/router and reconfigure the
wireless network setup.
Wireless
Your machine is trying to
connect to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi
network. The current
channel set on your wireless
LAN access point/router is
not supported.
Change the channel on your wireless LAN access point/router to a
channel supported by your machine.
1. Confirm the channels supported by your machine.
USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries: See Related
Information: 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your
Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries only).
All other countries: Go to
support.brother.com/g/d/a5m6/, select
your model, and then click Download for more information.
2. Check your wireless LAN access point/router‘s channel setting.
Make sure it is set to one of the channels supported by your
machine, and not set to "Auto" or "Automatic". For more
information about changing the channel setting, see the
instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
3. Try to connect your machine to your Wi-Fi network again.
Wireless
Your security settings (SSID/
password) are not correct.
Confirm the SSID and password.
When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID and
password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your mobile
device supports the manual configuration, the SSID and password
will be displayed on your mobile device’s screen.
Wi-Fi Direct
You are using Android
™
4.0.
If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after
using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS
(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a Group Owner.
Wi-Fi Direct
Your Brother machine is
placed too far from your
mobile device.
Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 meter) of the
mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Wi-Fi Direct
There are some obstructions
(walls or furniture, for
example) between your
Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. Wi-Fi Direct
272
Cause Action Interface
machine and the mobile
device.
There is a wireless
computer, Bluetooth
®
-
supported device,
microwave oven, or digital
cordless phone near the
Brother machine or your
mobile device.
Move other devices away from the Brother machine or your mobile
device.
Wi-Fi Direct
You have checked and tried
all of the above, but your
Brother machine still cannot
complete the Wi-Fi Direct
configuration.
• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how
many devices are allowed on the current Wi-Fi Direct network,
and then check how many devices are connected.
Wi-Fi Direct
For Windows
If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we
recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean
countries only)
273
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's
Network > My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
Cause Action Interface
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
Some security software might block access without showing a security
alert dialog box even after successful installation.
To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask
the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your Brother machine was
not assigned an available
IP address.
• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.
Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your
computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the
same network.
For more information about how to verify the IP address and the
Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.
• Windows
Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network
Connection Repair Tool.
Wired/Wireless
A failed print job is still in
your computer's print
queue.
• If a failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.
• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and
cancel all documents:
- Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and
printers.
- Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019,
and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the
Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices
and printers.
- Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware
group, click View devices and printers.
- Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.
In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >
Printers.
- Mac
Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners.
Wired/Wireless
Your machine is not
connected to the wireless
network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above, but your machine still cannot print, uninstall the driver (Windows)
and reinstall it.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
274
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network > I
Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
Check Action Interface
Check that your Brother
machine, access point/
router, or network hub is
turned on.
Check the following:
• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is
turned on.
• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link LED is
blinking.
• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is installed correctly.
• The machine's cover is fully closed.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the
Brother machine and to the router or hub.
Wired/Wireless
Check the Link Status
on the Network
Configuration Report or
the Printer Settings
page.
Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link
Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK.
Wired/Wireless
Check that you can
"ping" the Brother
machine from your
computer.
Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or
the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal
application:
ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>.
• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and
connected to the same network as your computer.
• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same
network as your computer.
Windows:
Ask your administrator about the IP address and the subnet mask, and
then use the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Mac:
Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.
Wired/Wireless
Check that your Brother
machine is connected to
the wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with
your wireless access point/router to find the SSID (Network Name) and the Network Key (Password) information
and set them correctly.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• My Machine Cannot Print over the Network
276
Home > Troubleshooting > AirPrint Problems
AirPrint Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
My machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
Move your mobile device closer to the wireless access
point/router, or to your machine.
I cannot print. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
I am trying to print a multi-page document from an iOS
device, but ONLY the first page is printing.
Make sure you are running the latest OS version.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Overview
277
Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems
Other Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as
lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the
machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power
cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and press to turn on the machine.
If the problem is not solved, press and hold
to turn off
the machine. If you are using a backup battery or surge
suppressor device, disconnect it to make sure it is not the
problem. Plug the machine’s power cord directly into a
different known working wall outlet and press to turn
on the machine.
The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary
with the BR-Script3 printer driver.
(Windows)
To print EPS data, do the following:
1. Windows 11:
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows
Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022:
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012:
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012 R2:
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon with BR-Script3 in the
name, select Printer properties.
If your model with
BR-Script3 in the name does
not appear, right-click your model's icon, select
Printer properties, and then select your model
with BR-Script3 in the name.
3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged
Binary Communication Protocol) in Output Protocol.
The Brother software cannot be installed.
(Windows)
If the Security Software warning appears on the computer
screen during the installation, change the Security
Software settings to permit the Brother product setup
program or other program to run.
(Mac)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or
antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then
install the Brother software.
278
Home > Troubleshooting > Check the Machine Information
Check the Machine Information
Follow these instructions to check your machine's serial number and firmware version.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Machine Info.] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select one of the following options:
Option Description
Serial No.
Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Page Counter
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life
Check the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press OK.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Information].
2. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Serial No.
Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Firmware Update
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
View firmware information on the Home screen.
Page Counter
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life
Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
280
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Functions > Machine Reset
Machine Reset
Use the Machine Reset function to reset the machine's settings to the factory settings.
The network settings and the security settings will not be reset by the Machine Reset function.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [Initial Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Reset]. Press OK.
c. Select [Machine Reset]. Press OK.
2. Press a to select [Reset].
3. Press a to restart the machine.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset] > [Machine Reset].
2. Do one of the following:
Option Description
Press Yes for 2 seconds Reboot the machine. The machine will begin the reset.
No
The machine will exit without rebooting.
If you exit without rebooting, your machine will not reset and your settings will remain unchanged.
Related Information
• Reset Functions
282
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Functions > Network Reset
Network Reset
Use the Network Reset function to restore the machine's network settings, such as password and IP address,
back to the factory settings.
Unplug all the interface cables before you perform a Network Reset.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [Initial Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Reset]. Press OK.
c. Select [Network Reset]. Press OK.
2. Press a to select [Reset].
3. Press a to restart the machine.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset] > [Network Reset].
2. Do one of the following:
Option Description
Press Yes for 2 seconds Reboot the machine. The machine will begin the reset.
No
The machine will exit without rebooting.
If you exit without rebooting, your machine will not reset and your settings will remain unchanged.
Related Information
• Reset Functions
283
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Functions > Factory Reset
Factory Reset
Use the Factory Reset function to restore all settings back to the factory settings.
Unplug all the interface cables before you perform a Factory Reset.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [Initial Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Reset]. Press OK.
c. Select [Factory Reset]. Press OK.
2. Press a to select [Reset].
3. Press a to restart the machine.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset] > [Factory Reset].
2. Do one of the following:
Option Description
Press Yes for 2 seconds Reboot the machine. The machine will begin the reset.
No
The machine will exit without rebooting.
If you exit without rebooting, your machine will not reset and your settings will remain unchanged.
Related Information
• Reset Functions
284
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies
Replace Supplies
You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over.
The toner cartridge and drum unit are two separate supplies. Make sure both are installed as an assembly. The
order number of supplies may vary depending on the country.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
Belt Unit
286
Waste Toner Box
NOTE
• Be sure to seal the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Brother is committed to minimizing the environmental impact due to waste. For more information on
recycling options, contact your local recycling office or visit:
- In USA:
www.brother-usa.com/Environment
- In Canada: www.brother.ca/en/environment
• We recommend placing both the new and the used supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally
spilling or scattering the contents.
• Using paper that is not a direct equivalent for a recommended print media may reduce the life of supplies
and machine parts.
• The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement
will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering
on/off the machine.
• Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of
media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash
it off with cold water.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Replace the Waste Toner Box
287
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the color shown on the LCD.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
288
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new toner cartridge.
6. Remove the protective materials.
1
2
3
The shape of the toner cartridge will vary depending on your country and region.
289
7. Insert the new toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
• After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn off the machine or open the top cover until the machine's
display returns to Ready Mode.
• The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is a Starter toner cartridge.
• We recommend keeping a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning.
• DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it.
• If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance.
Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely
affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is
proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the
warranty.
290
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Drum Unit
Replace the Drum Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
>> Replace the Drum Unit
>> Reset the Drum Counter (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
>> Reset the Drum Counter (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Replace the Drum Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the color shown on the LCD.
292
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new drum unit.
6. Remove the protective cover.
1
2
3
293
7. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the new drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
11. Reset the drum counter by following the next section.
NOTE
• Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner and
other materials in the paper path. When a drum reaches the factory-established rotation limit
corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to replace the drum. The product
will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal.
• If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or artificial light for long periods of time), the unit
may be damaged.
• There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of
paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at
approximately 20,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of
pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
294
Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot
guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
• The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although
not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print
quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that
non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty.
IMPORTANT
• To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the drum counter unless you are
replacing the drum unit.
• If you reset the drum counter without replacing the drum unit, the machine will not be able to correctly
calculate the remaining drum life.
Reset the Drum Counter (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Make sure the machine's cover is closed.
3. Press OK and a at the same time.
4. Press OK to select [Drum].
5. Select the toner color for the drum unit you just replaced, and then press OK.
6. Select a to reset the drum counter.
Reset the Drum Counter (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold
for about five seconds.
3. Press [Drum].
4. Select the toner color for the drum unit you just replaced.
5. Press [Yes].
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
• Error and Maintenance Messages
295
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Belt Unit
Replace the Belt Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
>> Replace the Belt Unit
>> Reset the Belt Unit Counter (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
>> Reset the Belt Unit Counter (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Replace the Belt Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
296
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the
machine.
5. Unpack the new belt unit and insert it into the machine.
297
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
6. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
7. Close the machine's top cover.
8. Reset the belt unit counter by following the next section.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the belt unit counter unless you are
replacing the belt unit.
Reset the Belt Unit Counter (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Make sure the machine's cover is closed.
3. Press OK and a at the same time.
4. Press a or b to display the [Belt] option, and then press OK.
5. Select a to reset the belt counter.
Reset the Belt Unit Counter (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold
for about five seconds.
3. Press [Belt].
4. Press [Yes].
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
298
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Waste Toner Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
300
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the
machine.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
301
5. Remove the orange packing material and discard it.
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not
required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to
protect your machine during shipment.
6. Hold the green handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.
7. Unpack the new waste toner box and install the new waste toner box in the machine. Make sure the waste
toner box is level and fits firmly into place.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
302
8. Reinsert the belt unit into the machine.
9. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
303
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine
Clean the Machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed
pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or
ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry,
lint-free cloth.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
304
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the LED Heads
Clean the LED Heads
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
If there is a problem with the print quality, such as light or faded colors, white streaks, or bands that run down the
page, clean the LED heads as follows:
1. Press and hold
to turn off the machine.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
3. Wipe each LED head window (1) with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. Do not touch the windows with your fingers.
1
1
4. Close the machine's top cover.
5. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
306
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol).
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
3. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
307
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Corona Wires
Clean the Corona Wires
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
1. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
2. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
308
3. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
4. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
5. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
309
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Drum Unit
Clean the Drum Unit
• If your printout has black or white dots or other repeating marks at 3.0 in. (75 mm) intervals, the drum may
have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface.
• Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press a or b to display the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Drum Dot Print] option, and then press OK.
4. Press Go.
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
5. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
6. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
310
7. The color of printed dots on the Drum Dot Check Sheet is the color of the drum you should clean. Remove
the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly that matches the color causing the problem.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
8. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
311
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
9. Lift the drum unit frame by the handle and rotate it counterclockwise, as shown.
10. Loosen your grip so the frame drops forward, and then use your right hand to locate the drum unit gear inside
the right side of the frame.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
11. Tilt your left hand up to lift the frame so the numbered grid is visible, as shown. Use your right hand to rotate
the drum while you look for marks or debris on the drum surface.
312
Use the column numbers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a dot in column 2 on the
Drum Dot Check Sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the drum.
12. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
13. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
313
14. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
15. Close the machine's top cover.
16. Press
to turn on the machine.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print].
3. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
5. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
314
6. The color of printed dots on the Drum Dot Check Sheet is the color of the drum you should clean. Remove
the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly that matches the color causing the problem.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
7. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
315
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
8. Lift the drum unit frame by the handle and rotate it counterclockwise, as shown.
9. Loosen your grip so the frame drops forward, and then use your right hand to locate the drum unit gear inside
the right side of the frame.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
10. Tilt your left hand up to lift the frame so the numbered grid is visible, as shown. Use your right hand to rotate
the drum while you look for marks or debris on the drum surface.
316
Use the column numbers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a dot in column 2 on the
Drum Dot Check Sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the drum.
11. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
12. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
317
13. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
14. Close the machine's top cover.
15. Press
to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
318
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds correctly.
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it.
4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper
tray to remove dust.
5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust.
6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
7. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
Related Topics:
• Printing Problems
319
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing
Correct Color Printing
If the color print quality is poor, calibrate the output density of each color, and then perform the color alignment.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Color Correction] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Correction Start] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a to select [Yes].
The color correction starts automatically and will take a few minutes.
5. Press Cancel.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
To perform the calibrations of each color's output density and color alignment in sequence, set the Auto
Correction function to On.
1. Press [Toner] > [Color Correction] > [Correction Start].
2. Press [Yes].
The color correction starts automatically and will take a few minutes.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Set the Auto Correction Function
• Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
321
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing > Set the Auto Correction Function
Set the Auto Correction Function
If you want your machine to automatically perform color alignment after calibrating colors, turn on the Auto
Correction function.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Color Correction] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Auto Correction] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a or b to select [On] and then press OK.
5. Press Cancel.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Color Correction] > [Auto
Correction] > [On].
2. Press
.
Related Information
• Correct Color Printing
322
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing > Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
If the output color differs from what you see on your screen, try resetting your machine's color correction settings.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the [Color Correction] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the [Reset] option, and then press OK.
4. Press a to select [Reset].
5. Press Cancel.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Toner] > [Color Correction] > [Reset].
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Correct Color Printing
323
Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life
Check the Remaining Part Life
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the [Machine Info.] option, and then press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [Parts Life] option, and then press OK.
3. Press a or b to select the machine part you want to check, and then press OK.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
4. Press Cancel.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Information] > [Parts Life].
2. Press a or b to display the machine parts, and then press the machine part you want to check.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
3. Press
.
To display the approximate remaining life of toner cartridges, press [Toner] > [Toner Life].
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
324
Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack and Ship Your Machine
Pack and Ship Your Machine
WARNING
• When you move the machine, carry the machine as shown in the illustration.
• If the machine has Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the machine.
Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you or
damage to the machine.
• Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in the original carton with original packing material.
• If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to
avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
• Unless you are returning the machine as part of the Brother Exchange Service, leave the toner
cartridges and the drum unit inside the machine when you pack and ship it.
• The components included in the box may differ depending on your country.
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down.
2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in.
325
4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the
original packing material as shown. (The original packing material may differ depending on your country.) If
you are returning your machine to Brother as part of the Exchange Service, pack only the machine.
5. Close the carton and tape it shut.
6. If you have a Lower Tray, repack it as shown.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
326
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace the following parts regularly to maintain print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced after
printing approximately 50,000 pages
1
based on two pages per job and 100,000
1 2
pages based on five pages
per job for the Fuser Unit and approximately 50,000 pages
1 3
for the PF Kit MP.
Contact Brother Customer Service or a Brother Authorized Service Center when the following messages appear
on the LCD:
LCD Message Description
Maintenance
Replace Fuser
4
Replace the Fuser Unit.
Maintenance
Replace PF Kit MP
3 4 5
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose Tray.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
1
Letter or A4 size single-sided pages
2
HL-L3295CDW
3
HL-L3295CDW
4
The replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used.
5
The kit includes the roller holder assembly, separation pad, and separation pad spring for the MP Tray.
327
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings
General Settings
• Set Sleep Mode Countdown
• About Deep Sleep Mode
• Set Auto Power Off Mode
• Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
• Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
• Reduce Toner Consumption
• Reduce Printing Noise
• Change the Language on the LCD
330
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Sleep Mode Countdown
Set Sleep Mode Countdown
The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. Select how long the machine
must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode timer is reset when the machine receives a print
job.
When the machine is in Sleep Mode, it acts as if it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing
when it receives a print job. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters
Sleep Mode.
The Sleep Mode setting cannot be disabled due to environmental considerations.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Ecology]. Press OK.
c. Select [Sleep Time]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to enter the length of time (up to 50 minutes), in minutes, that the machine should remain idle
before entering Sleep Mode.
Press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time].
2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and
then press [OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
331
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > About
Deep Sleep Mode
About Deep Sleep Mode
If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will
automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings.
Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode.
The Deep Sleep Mode setting cannot be disabled due to environmental considerations.
Applicable Models Machine's Control Panel in Deep
Sleep Mode
Conditions That Will Wake the
Machine
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW The LCD displays Deep Sleep. • The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses a button on the
control panel.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW The LCD backlight turns off and the
Power LED blinks.
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses
, , or the
touchscreen LCD.
Related Information
• General Settings
332
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Auto Power Off Mode
Set Auto Power Off Mode
If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine
will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is
connected to a network or has secure print data in the memory(available for certain models).
To start printing, press on the control panel and then send a print job.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Select how long the machine must be in Deep Sleep Mode before it goes into Auto Power Off Mode.
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Ecology]. Press OK.
c. Select [Auto Power Off]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to select the length of time (1, 2, 4, or 8 hours) that the machine should remain idle before
entering Power Off Mode.
3. Press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Auto Power Off].
2. Press a or b to display the length of time the machine will remain idle before entering Power Off Mode, and
then press the option you want.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
333
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the LCD Backlight Brightness
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Backlight].
2. Press the option you want:
• [Light]
• [Med]
• [Dark]
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
334
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim Timer].
2. Press the option you want:
• [10 Secs]
• [20 Secs]
• [30 Secs]
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
335
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Toner Consumption
Reduce Toner Consumption
Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your
documents appears lighter.
We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or grayscale images.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Ecology]. Press OK.
c. Select [Toner Save]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to display [On], and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
336
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Printing Noise
Reduce Printing Noise
The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes
slower. The factory setting is off.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [General Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Ecology]. Press OK.
c. Select [Quiet Mode]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to display the [On] or [Off] option, and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
337
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
the Language on the LCD
Change the Language on the LCD
Change the LCD language if needed.
This feature is not available in some countries.
>> HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
>> HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
1. Press a or b to select the following:
a. Select [Initial Setup]. Press OK.
b. Select [Local Language]. Press OK.
2. Press a or b to display your language, and then press Go.
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language].
2. Press your language.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
338
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables
Settings and Features Tables
The Settings tables will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s
programs.
• Settings Tables (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
• Settings Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
• Feature Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
339
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
Settings Tables (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
Related Models: HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
Use these tables to understand the various menus and options that you will use to set your preferences on the
machine.
>> [General Setup]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network]
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Info.]
>> [Initial Setup]
[General Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Description
Tray Setting Paper Type
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard
paper tray.
Paper Size
- Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray.
Manual Feed
- Select whether to print from the Manual Feed Slot.
Print
Position
X Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages)
horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages)
vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Check Paper
- Select whether to display a message telling you to check that the
size of the paper in the machine and the machine's Paper Size
setting match.
Ecology Eco Mode
- Turn on the following machine settings at the same time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
1
(available for certain models)
• Sleep Time: 0Min
• Quiet Mode:On
1
• Toner Save:On
1
Toner Save
- Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- Set how much time should pass before the machine enters Power
Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power
Off
- Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep
Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode.
Panel Control Button Repeat
-
Set the time for the LCD message to change when holding a or b.
Message
Scroll
- Set the time in seconds that an LCD message will scroll across
the LCD. From Level 1 (0.2 s) to Level 10 (2 s).
LCD Contrast
- Adjust the contrast of the LCD.
Auto Online
- Set the machine to return to Ready mode after it has been idle for
30 seconds.
Setting Lock
- - Lock your machine’s settings using the Setting Lock password.
Interface Select
- Select the interface to use.
If you select Auto, the machine changes the interface to USB or
network depending on which interface is receiving data.
340
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Description
Interface Auto IF Time
- Set the time-out period for the auto interface selection.
Input Buffer
- Increase or decrease the input buffer capacity.
1
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
[Printer]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Description
Emulation
- - Choose the emulation mode.
Quality
- - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print the font list and samples of HP LaserJet.
BR-Script 3
Print the font list and samples of BR-Script.
Test Print
- Print the test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Select whether to print on both sides of the paper.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image,
select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing
time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must select the
2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed
for preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on
the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select if you want the machine to clear paper size
errors or media type errors automatically.
Output Color
- - Set the output color.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Edge Emphasis
- - Make the text appear sharper.
Print Position X Offset
- Move the print start position (at the upper left corner
of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right)
dots in 300 dpi.
Y Offset
- Move the print start position (at the upper left corner
of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down)
dots in 300 dpi.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
HP LaserJet Font No.
- Set the font number.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
341
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Description
HP LaserJet Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage
return when the carriage position reaches the right
margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage
return when the carriage position reaches the bottom
margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1
cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the
paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge
of the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when
you use the HP drivers.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error
information when errors occur.
CAPT
- Use CAPT (Color Advanced Printing Technology) for
optimal print quality when printing a PS file created by
a non-Brother PS driver.
Colors and photos appear clearer and more accurate.
Print speed will be slower.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Print Opt
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the
text.
Fit to Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in
the PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Color
Correction
Correction
Start
- Initiate color calibration to check and correct colors.
Reset
- Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Auto
Correction
- Set the machine to perform Color Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Color Settings Setting Mode
Select whether to apply the color print settings of the
machine or the printer driver.
Color Mode
Select the color mode.
Improve Gray
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of shaded
areas.
Enhance Black
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
Red
Adjust the red color.
Green
Adjust the green color.
Blue
Adjust the blue color.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
342
[Network]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN
(HL-L3240CDW)
TCP/IP Boot
Method
- Choose the IP method that best suits your
needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet
Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
WINS
Config
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS
Server
Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary WINS
server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the secondary
WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary DNS
server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS
server.
APIPA
- Allocate the IP address from the link-local
address range automatically
1
.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Choose the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - Display the wired network connection status.
MAC Address
- - Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore your machine's wired network
settings to the factory settings.
Wired Enable
- - Turn on or off the wired interface.
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Network
- - Configure the wireless network settings using
the setup wizard.
TCP/IP Boot
Method
- Choose the IP method that best suits your
needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet
Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
WINS
Config
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS
Server
Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary WINS
server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the secondary
WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the primary DNS
server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS
server.
343
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN(Wi-Fi) TCP/IP APIPA
- Allocate the IP address from the link-local
address range automatically
1
.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push Button
- - Configure your wireless network settings
using the one-button push method.
WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure the wireless network settings using
WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status Status
- Display the wireless network connection
status.
Signal
- Display the wireless network signal strength.
Channel
- Display the channel in use when Status is
Active.
Speed
- Display the connection speed when Status
is Active.
SSID
- Display the wireless SSID (Network Name).
Comm. Mode
- Display the current Communication mode.
MAC Address
- - Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
(HL-L3240CDW)
- - Restore your machine's wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
- - Turn the wireless interface on or off.
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings
manually.
Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings
using the one-button push method quickly.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings
using WPS with a PIN code quickly.
Device Info. Device
Name
- View your machine's device name.
SSID
- Display the Group Owner's SSID (Network
Name).
IP Address
- Display your machine's IP Address.
Status Info. Status
- Display the Wi-Fi Direct network status.
Signal
- Display the current Wi-Fi Direct network
signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group Owner,
the LCD always displays Strong.
Channel
- Display the channel in use when the Status
is G/O Active or Client Active.
Speed
- Display the connection speed when the
Status is G/O Active or Client
Active.
I/F Enable
- - Enable or disable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Web Based Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based Management.
If you enable this function, make sure you
specify the connection method to use Web
Based Management.
344
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP
protocol that provides authentication and
encryption services. We recommend
contacting your network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global Detect Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a function
that detects and notifies the user when the
user unintentionally connects to a global
network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global network.
Network Reset
- - - Restore all network settings of your machine
to the factory settings.
1
On connection to the network, if the machine's ‘Boot Method’ is ‘Auto’ the machine will attempt to set the IP address and Subnet Mask
from a boot server such as DHCP. If a boot server cannot be found, an APIPA IP address will be allocated, such as 169. 254. (001-254).
(000-255). If the ‘Boot Method’ of the machine is set to ‘Static’, you must manually enter an IP address from the machine's control panel.
[Print Reports]
Level 3
Level 4 Description
Printer Settings
- Print the Printer Settings page.
Network Config
- Print the Network Configuration Report.
Print File List
- Print a list of data saved in the memory.
Drum Dot Print
- Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
- Print the wireless connection diagnostics report.
[Machine Info.]
Level 3
Level 4 Description
Serial No.
- Display the machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
Display the machine's firmware version.
Security Version
Page Counter Total
Display the total number of printed pages.
Color
Display the total color printed pages.
Black and White
Display the total monochrome printed pages.
Parts Life
1
Toner
Display the remaining life of each toner.
Drum
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Belt
Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
[Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Description
Reset Machine Reset
Restore all the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Factory Reset
Restore all the machine's settings to the factory defaults. Perform this
operation when you dispose of your machine.
Local Language
- Select the LCD language for your country.
345
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Settings Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
>> [Settings]
>> [General Setup]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network]
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Information]
>> [Initial Setup]
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 2
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Toner Toner Life
- View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print
- Print a test page.
Color
Correction
Correction
Start
Initiate color calibration to check and correct colors.
Reset
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Toner Cartridge
Check
Black
View the installed toner cartridge information on the
LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Network Wired LAN
- Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
- Access the WLAN setting menus.
Wi-Fi Direct
- - Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus.
Tray Setting
- - Access the tray setting menus.
Eco Mode
- - Turn on the following machine settings at the same time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
1
• Sleep Time: 0 Min
• Dim Timer: 10 Secs
• Quiet Mode:On
1
• Toner Save:On
1
All Settings
- - Configure the detailed settings.
1
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type MP Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
- Select the paper type that matches the paper
in the MP tray.
347
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type Tray 1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper
in the standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
(HL-L3295CDW)
- Select the paper type that matches the paper
in the Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Paper Size MP Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
- Select the paper size you loaded in the MP
tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the
standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
(HL-L3295CDW)
- Select the paper size you loaded in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Manual Feed
(HL-L3280CDW)
- - Select whether to print from the Manual Feed
Slot.
Tray Use
(HL-L3295CDW)
- - Select the paper tray you want to use.
Priority
(HL-L3295CDW)
- - When the Auto option is selected in the
Tray Use menu, select the order in which
the machine uses paper trays that contain
paper of the same size.
Print Position MP Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
X
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Tray 2
1
(HL-L3295CDW)
X
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Skip Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
- - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is
loaded with the wrong size paper.
Separator Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
- - Select the tray that contains the paper used
as the separator paper, which is inserted
between each print job.
Check Paper
- - Select whether or not to display a message
indicating you must check the paper type and
paper size when you pull a paper tray out of
the machine.
LCD
Settings
Backlight
- - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer
- - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on
after the last finger press.
Screen
Settings
Display
Information
IP Address
- Select whether to display your machine's IP
Address on the Home screen.
1
Available if the Optional Tray is installed.
348
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Ecology Eco Mode
- - Turn on the following machine settings at the
same time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
2
• Sleep Time: 0 Min
• Dim Timer: 10 Secs
• Quiet Mode:On
2
• Toner Save:On
2
Toner Save
- - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- - Set how much time should pass before the
machine enters Power Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off
- - Set the number of hours that the machine will
remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into
Power Off mode.
Setting
Lock
Set Password
- - Restrict unauthorized users from changing
the machine’s settings.
Lock Off⇒On
- -
New Password
(Available only when
you enter the
password for the first
time.)
- -
Interface Select
- - Select the interface to use.
If you select the Auto option, the machine
changes the interface to USB or network
depending on which interface is receiving
data.
Auto IF Time
- - Set the time-out period for the auto interface
selection.
Input Buffer
- - Increase or decrease the input buffer
capacity.
Delete
Storage
Macro ID
- - Delete the registered Macro data.
Stream ID
- - Delete the registered Stream data.
Font ID
- - Delete the registered Font data.
Delete All
- - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and
Font data to the factory settings.
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation
- - Choose the emulation mode.
Quality
- - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print the font list and samples of HP LaserJet.
BR-Script 3
Print the font list and samples of BR-Script.
Test Print
- Print the test page.
2 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
349
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Select whether to print on both sides of the
paper.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided
image, select the 1-sided Feed option to
reduce printing time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must
select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select
1-sided Feed for preprinted paper, the last
page will be printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select this setting if you want the machine to
clear paper size errors or media type errors,
and use paper from other trays.
Output Color
- - Set the output color.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Edge Emphasis
- - Make the text appear sharper.
Print Position MP Tray
(HL-L3295CDW)
X Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to
+500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y Offset
(HL-L3295CDW)
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to
+500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Tray 2
(HL-L3295CDW)
X Offset
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to
+500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Y Offset
(HL-L3295CDW)
Move the print start position (at the upper left
corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
HP LaserJet Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
Soft Font No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on
your Brother machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
350
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
HP LaserJet Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT
+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and
carriage return when the carriage position
reaches the right margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and
carriage return when the carriage position
reaches the bottom margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at
1 cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns
at 1 cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge
of the paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom
edge of the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears
when you use the HP drivers.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error
information when errors occur.
CAPT
- Use CAPT (Color Advanced Printing
Technology) for optimal print quality when
printing a PS file created by a non-Brother PS
driver.
Colors and photos appear clearer and more
accurate. Print speed will be slower.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple
pages.
PDF Print
Options
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either
comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file,
along with the text.
PDF Fit to Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the
pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper
size.
Carbon Menu
(HL-L3295CDW)
Carbon Copy
- Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Copies
- Set the number of printed pages.
Copy1 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Copy1 Stream
- Select a stream for Copy1.
Copy2 Tray
...
Copy8 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Copy2 Stream
...
Copy8 Stream
- Select a stream for Copy2 to 8.
Color Correction Correction Start
- Initiate color calibration to check and correct
colors.
Reset
- Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
351
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Color Correction Auto Correction
- Set the machine to perform Color Calibration
and Registration automatically.
Color Settings Setting Mode
Select whether to apply the color print settings
of the machine or the printer driver.
Color Mode
Select the color mode.
Improve Gray
Color
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of
shaded areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
Red
Adjust the red color.
Green
Adjust the green color.
Blue
Adjust the blue color.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory
settings.
[Network]
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method
- Choose the IP method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the primary DNS server's
IP address.
Secondary
Specify the secondary DNS
server's IP address.
APIPA
- Allocate the IP address from the
link-local address range
automatically
1
.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Choose the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - Display the wired network
connection status.
MAC Address
- - Display your machine's MAC
address.
352
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN Set to Default
- - Restore your machine's wired
network settings to the factory
settings.
Wired Enable
- - Turn on or off the wired interface.
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Wi-Fi
Network
- - Configure your wireless network
settings manually.
TCP/IP Boot Method
- Choose the IP method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the primary DNS server's
IP address.
Secondary
Specify the secondary DNS
server's IP address.
APIPA
- Allocate the IP address from the
link-local address range
automatically
1
.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push
Button
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure the wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN
code.
WLAN Status Status
- Display the wireless network
connection status.
Signal
- Display the wireless network signal
strength.
SSID
- Display the wireless SSID (Network
Name).
Comm. Mode
- Display the current Communication
mode.
MAC Address
- - Display your machine's MAC
address.
Set to Default
- - Restore your machine's wireless
network settings to the factory
settings.
WLAN Enable
- - Turn the wireless interface on or
off.
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings manually.
353
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wi-Fi Direct Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using the one-
button push method quickly.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using WPS with a
PIN code quickly.
Device
Information
Device Name
- View your machine's device name.
SSID
- Display the Group Owner's SSID
(Network Name).
IP Address
- Display your machine's IP Address.
Status
Information
Status
- Display the Wi-Fi Direct network
status.
Signal
- Display the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
I/F Enable
- - Enable or disable the Wi-Fi Direct
connection.
NFC
(HL-L3295CDW)
- - - Turn the NFC function on or off.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the web connection
settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
Web Based Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make
sure you specify the connection
method to use Web Based
Management.
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security
feature of the IP protocol that
provides authentication and
encryption services. We
recommend contacting your
network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global Detect Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a
function that detects and notifies
the user when the user
unintentionally connects to a global
network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network Reset
- - - Restore all network settings of your
machine to the factory settings.
1
On connection to the network, if the machine's ‘Boot Method’ is ‘Auto’ the machine will attempt to set the IP address and Subnet Mask
from a boot server such as DHCP. If a boot server cannot be found, an APIPA IP address will be allocated, such as 169. 254. (001-254).
(000-255). If the ‘Boot Method’ of the machine is set to ‘Static’ you must manually enter an IP address from the machine's control panel.
354
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3 Descriptions
Printer Settings
Print the Printer Settings page.
Network Configuration
Print the Network Configuration Report.
Print File List
Print a list of data saved in the memory.
Drum Dot Print
Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
Print the wireless connection diagnostics report.
[Machine Information]
[All Settings] > [Machine Information]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Serial No.
- Display the machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Sub3 Version
Security Version
Firmware Update
- Update your machine's firmware to the latest version.
Firmware Auto Check
- View firmware information on the Home screen.
Page Counter Total
Display the total number of printed pages.
Color
Display the total color printed pages.
Black and White
Display the total monochrome printed pages.
Parts Life
1
Drum
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Belt
Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
PF Kit MP
(HL-L3295CDW)
Display the remaining life of the PF Kit MP.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Reset Machine Reset
Restore all the machine's settings that you have changed, such as Paper
Type.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings of your machine to the factory settings.
Factory Reset
Reset the machine and restore the printer settings (including command
settings) to the factory settings.
Local Language
- Select the LCD language for your country.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
355
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Feature Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Feature Tables (HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Related Models: HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
>> [Toner]
>> Wi-Fi Setup
>> [Functions]
>> [Secure Print]
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
(Toner)
Toner Life
- View the approximate remaining toner life for each color.
Test Print
- Print the test page.
Color Correction Correction
Start
Perform color calibration to check and correct colors, and
then perform registration to align the print position of each
color.
Reset
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Toner Cartridge
Check
Black
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD,
for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Wi-Fi Setup
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Level 2
Level 3 Descriptions
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Find Wi-Fi Network
Configure the wireless network settings using the setup wizard.
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS/PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory
settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1
Available after a Wi-Fi
®
connection has been configured.
356
[Functions]
[Functions]
Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
(Functions)
Web
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
Direct Print
(HL-L3295CDW)
Press to access the Direct Print menu.
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 2
Descriptions
(Secure Print)
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
357
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• What is Web Based Management?
• Access Web Based Management
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
358
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > What is Web
Based Management?
What is Web Based Management?
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
•
Make sure your machine is On and connected to the same network as your computer, and that your
network supports the TCP/IP protocol.
The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
359
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Access Web
Based Management
Access Web Based Management
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box. To avoid displaying the warning dialog box, you can install a self-signed certificate to use
SSL/TLS communication. For more information, see Related Information.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from
unauthorized access.
>> Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
(Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
360
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model
name from the list. Click OK.
3. Click
(Machine Settings).
4. Click All Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
5. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
6. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
You can also access Web Based Management from Brother Mobile Connect for mobile devices.
Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Machine Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the
configuration.
After configuring the settings, click Logout.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Use SSL/TLS
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
361
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set or Change a
Login Password for Web Based Management
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorized
access.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you have previously set your own password, type it, and then click Login.
• If you have not previously set your own password, type the default login password, and then click Login.
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Login Password.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and
marked "Pwd".
• Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. To change the password, type your current password in the Enter Old Password field.
6. Following the on-screen Login Password guidelines, type your new password in the Enter New Password
field.
7. Retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field.
8. Click Submit.
You can also change the lockout settings in the Login Password menu.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
362
Home > Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
>> General Specifications
>> Print Media Specifications
>> Printer Specifications
>> Interface Specifications
>> Direct Print Feature Specifications
>> Supported Protocols and Security Features
>> Computer Requirements Specifications
General Specifications
Printer Type
LED
Print Method Electrophotographic LED Printer
Memory Capacity Standard • HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
256 MB
• HL-L3295CDW
512 MB
Machine display • HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
16 characters x 1 line
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
2.7 in. (67.5 mm) TFT Color touchscreen LCD
1
Power Source 110 V to 120 V AC 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
(Average)
Peak • HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 960 W
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 960 W
Printing
2
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 480 W at 77°F (25°C)
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW
Approximately 590 W at 77°F (25°C)
• HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 610 W at 77°F (25°C)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
2
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 310 W at 77°F (25°C)
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 310 W at 77°F (25°C)
Ready
2
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 70 W at 77°F (25°C)
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 70 W at 77°F (25°C)
364
Power Consumption
(Average)
Sleep
2
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 7 W
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 7 W
Deep Sleep
2
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 0.5 W
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW
Approximately 0.4 W
• HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 0.45 W
Power Off
3
4
• HL-L3220CDW
Approximately 0.02 W
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Approximately 0.02 W
Dimensions
(Typical outline view)
(HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW)
(HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
Unit: in. (mm)
• HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
* : 15.7 (399)
** : 9.4 (239)
*** : 15.7 (399)
• HL-L3280CDW
* : 15.7 (399)
** : 10.8 (274)
*** : 15.7 (399)
• HL-L3295CDW
* : 15.7 (399)
** : 10.8 (274)
*** : 17.6 (446)
Weight (with supplies)
• HL-L3220CDW
33.5 lb (15.2 kg)
• HL-L3240CDW
33.5 lb (15.2 kg)
• HL-L3280CDW
33.9 lb (15.4 kg)
• HL-L3295CDW
36.8 lb (16.7 kg)
Noise Level
Sound Pressure Printing • HL-L3220CDW
LpAm = 46 dB (A)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
LpAm = 47 dB (A)
• HL-L3295CDW
LpAm = 48 dB (A)
365
Noise Level Sound Pressure Printing
(Quiet Mode)
LpAm = 43 dB (A)
Ready
Default: Inaudible
5
Sound Power
Printing
6
Monochrome
• HL-L3220CDW
LWAc = 6.25 B (A)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
LWAc = 6.39 B (A)
• HL-L3295CDW
LWAc = 6.50 B (A)
Color
• HL-L3220CDW
LWAc = 6.17 B (A)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
LWAc = 6.47 B (A)
• HL-L3295CDW
LWAc = 6.58 B (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
Monochrome
• HL-L3220CDW
LWAc = 5.86 B (A)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
LWAc = 5.86 B (A)
Color
• HL-L3220CDW
LWAc = 5.92 B (A)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
LWAc = 5.87 B (A)
Ready
Default: Inaudible
7
Temperature Operating From 50°F to 90.5°F (10°C to 32.5°C)
Storage From 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Humidity Operating 20% to 80% (without condensation)
Storage 35% to 85% (without condensation)
1
Measured diagonally.
2
Measured when the machine is connected using the same network connection as the ENERGY STAR Ver. 3.1 test method.
3
Measured according to IEC 62301 Edition 2.0.
4
Power consumption varies slightly depending on the usage environment.
5
If fan motor is functioning: LpAm = 40 dB (A)
6
Measured in accordance with the method described in ISO 7779.
7
- HL-L3220CDW
If fan motor is functioning: LWAc = 4.12 B (A)
- HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
If fan motor is functioning: LWAc = 4.81 B (A)
- HL-L3295CDW
If fan motor is functioning: LWAc = 2.62 B (A)
Print Media Specifications
Paper Input
Paper Tray
(Standard)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Recycled
Paper
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), B5 (ISO), B6 (JIS), A5, A5
(Long Edge), A6, Executive, Legal, Folio, Mexico
366
Paper Input Paper Tray
(Standard)
Legal, India Legal, 16K (195x270mm), A4 Short
(270mm Paper)
Paper Weight 16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m²)
Maximum
Paper Capacity
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
Manual Feed Slot
(HL-L3220CDW/
HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW)
Paper Type (HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW)
Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Recycled
Paper, Bond, Label, Envelope, Env. Thin, Env.Thick,
Glossy Paper
Paper Size • Width:
3.0 to 8.5 in. (76.2 to 216 mm)
• Length:
4.57 to 14 in. (116 to 355.6 mm)
• Envelope:
COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch
Paper Weight
(HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW)
16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m
2
)
Maximum
Paper Capacity
One sheet
Multi-purpose Tray (MP
Tray)
(HL-L3295CDW)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Recycled
Paper, Bond, Label, Envelope, Env. Thin, Env.Thick,
Glossy Paper
Paper Size • Width:
3.0 to 8.5 in. (76.2 to 216 mm)
• Length:
4.57 to 14 in. (116 to 355.6 mm)
• Envelope:
COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch
Paper Weight
16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m
2
)
Maximum
Paper Capacity
• Up to 30 Sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
• Envelope: 3 envelopes up to 6mm thick
Paper Tray 2
(Optional)
(HL-L3295CDW)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, Executive, Legal, Folio,
Mexico Legal, India Legal, 16K (195x270mm), A4
Short (270mm Paper)
Paper Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m
2
)
Maximum
Paper Capacity
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
Paper
Output
1
Face Down Output Tray
Up to 150 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
(face-down delivery to the face-down output paper
tray)
Face Up Output Tray One sheet (face up delivery to the face up output
tray)
2-sided Automatic 2-sided Printing Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, India Legal
Paper Weight 16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m²)
1
For labels, we recommend removing the printed sheets from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the
possibility of smudging.
367
Printer Specifications
Automatic 2-sided Print Yes
Emulation PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL6 (PCL XL Class3.0), BR-Script3, PDF Version 1.7, XPS Version
1.0
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 2,400 dpi class (600 x 2400) quality
Print Speed
1
1-sided Print
2
Monochrome
• HL-L3220CDW
Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 18 pages/minute (A4 size)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
Up to 27 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 26 pages/minute (A4 size)
• HL-L3295CDW
Up to 31 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 30 pages/minute (A4 size)
Color
• HL-L3220CDW
Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 18 pages/minute (A4 size)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
Up to 27 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 26 pages/minute (A4 size)
• HL-L3295CDW
Up to 31 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 30 pages/minute (A4 size)
2-sided Print
Monochrome
• HL-L3220CDW
Up to 7 sides/minute (Up to 3 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
Up to 10 sides/minute (Up to 5 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
• HL-L3295CDW
Up to 12 sides/minute (Up to 6 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
Color
• HL-L3220CDW
Up to 7 sides/minute (Up to 3 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
• HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW
Up to 10 sides/minute (Up to 5 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
• HL-L3295CDW
Up to 12 sides/minute (Up to 6 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
First Print Time
3
Monochrome
• HL-L3220CDW
Less than 15 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW
Less than 13.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
• HL-L3295CDW
Less than 12.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
Color
368
First Print Time
3
• HL-L3220CDW
Less than 15 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
• HL-L3240CDW
-
• HL-L3280CDW
Less than 13.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
• HL-L3295CDW
Less than 12.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
1
The print speed may be slower when the machine is connected by wireless LAN.
2
These print speeds are for 1-sided printing and measured in accordance with the ISO/IEC 24734 standard.
3
Printing from Ready mode and standard tray.
Interface Specifications
USB
1 2
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no more than 6 feet (2 meters) long.
LAN HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
3
Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode)
IEEE 802.11a/g/n (Wi-Fi Direct
®
)
NFC
4
HL-L3295CDW
Yes
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface.
2
Third party USB hub devices are not supported.
3
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable.
4
When you connect an external IC card reader, use a HID class driver supported device.
Direct Print Feature Specifications
NOTE
This function is available for HL-L3295CDW.
Compatibility
PDF version1.7, JPEG, Exif+JPEG, PRN (created by the machine's own printer driver), TIFF
(scanned by Brother models), XPS version 1.0
Interface USB direct interface: Front x1
Supported Protocols and Security Features
Ethernet (HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Wireless LAN (5 GHz)
IEEE 802.11a/n (Infrastructure Mode), IEEE 802.11a/n (Wi-Fi Direct)
Wireless LAN (2.4 GHz)
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode), IEEE 802.11g/n (Wi-Fi Direct)
Protocols (IPv4)
• HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS,
LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP Server, TELNET Server, HTTP/
369
HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, SMTP Client, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, ICMP, Web Services (Print), CIFS
client, SNTP client, Syslog
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA(Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS,
LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP Server, TELNET Server, HTTP/
HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, SMTP Client, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, ICMP, Web Services (Print), CIFS
client, SNTP client, LDAP, Syslog
Protocols (IPv6)
• HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW
NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP
Server,TELNET Server, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, SMTP Client, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMPv6, Web Services (Print), CIFS Client, SNTP Client, Syslog
• HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP
Server,TELNET Server, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, SMTP Client, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMPv6, Web Services (Print), CIFS Client, SNTP Client, LDAP, Syslog
Network Security (Wired) (HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW)
SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec
Network Security (Wireless)
SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS),
Kerberos, IPsec
Wireless Network Security
WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) (Wi-Fi Direct supports WPA2-PSK (AES)
only), WPA3-SAE (AES)
Wireless Certification
Wi-Fi Certification Mark License (WPA3
™
- Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS) Identifier
Mark License, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
™
Wi-Fi Direct
Computer Requirements Specifications
Supported Operating Systems And Software Functions
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
Computer Interface Processo
r
Hard Disk Space to
Install
1
USB
2
Wired
LAN
3
Wireless
LAN
For
Drivers
For
Application
s
(including
Drivers)
Windows
Operating
System
Windows 10
Home / 10 Pro /
10 Education / 10
Enterprise
Printing 32 bit
(x86) or
64 bit
(x64)
processor
50 MB 1.6 GB
Windows 11
Home / 11 Pro /
11 Education / 11
Enterprise
64 bit
(x64)
processor
Windows Server
2012
Printing 64 bit
(x64)
processor
50 MB 50 MB
370
Windows Server
2012 R2
Windows Server
2016
Windows Server
2019
Windows Server
2022
Mac
Operating
System
4
macOS v11 Printing 64bit
processor
N/A 500 MB
macOS v12
macOS v13
Chrome OS Printing N/A N/A N/A
1
An Internet connection is required to install the software if the installation disc is not supplied.
2
Third party USB ports are not supported.
3
HL-L3240CDW/HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
4
macOS Disclaimer AirPrint capable: Printing via macOS requires the use of AirPrint. Mac drivers are not provided for this machine.
For the latest driver updates, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
For the latest supported OS, go to your model's Supported OS page at
support.brother.com/os.
All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies.
Related Information
• Appendix
371
Home > Appendix > 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico
and Caribbean countries only)
5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA,
Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries only)
When connecting your machine to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi network, make sure your wireless LAN access point/router is
set to one of the channels available in your country and listed in the table below (recommended channel: 5.18 -
5.24 GHz). For more information about changing the channel setting, see the instructions supplied with your
wireless LAN access point/router.
Wi-Fi 5 GHz Channels 5.18 - 5.24 GHz (36/40/44/48)
5.26 - 5.32 GHz (52/56/60/64)
5.5 - 5.72 GHz (100/104/108/112/116/132/136/140/144)
5.745 - 5.825 GHz (149/153/157/161/165)
Related Information
• Appendix
372
Home > Appendix > Supplies
Supplies
When the time comes to replace supplies, such as the toner cartridge or drum unit, an error message will appear
on your machine's control panel or in the Status Monitor. For more information about the supplies for your
machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your local Brother dealer.
The Supply Order Number (No.) varies depending on your country and region.
Supply Items Supply Order No. Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Toner Cartridge Standard Toner:
TN229
• Black:
Approximately 1,500 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 1,200 pages
1
2
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
High Yield Toner:
TN229XL
• Black:
Approximately 3,000 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 2,300 pages
1
2
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Super High Yield Toner:
TN229XXL
• Black:
Approximately 4,500 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 4,000 pages
1
2
HL-L3295CDW
Value High Yield Toner:
TN229V
(Only available in USA)
• Black:
Approximately 3,300 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 2,530 pages
1
2
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Starter Toner:
(Supplied with your machine)
• Black:
Approximately 1,000 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 1,000 pages
1
2
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW
• Black:
Approximately 2,300 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 1,200 pages
1
2
HL-L3295CDW
373
Supply Items Supply Order No. Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Drum Unit
DR229CL
3
Approximately 20,000 pages
4
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Belt Unit BU229CL
Approximately 50,000 pages
5
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
Waste Toner
Box
WT229CL
Approximately 50,000 pages
2
HL-L3220CDW/HL-L3240CDW/
HL-L3280CDW/HL-L3295CDW
1
The approximate cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
2
Letter or A4 size single-sided pages
3
Contains four drum units; one black and three colors.
4
Approximately 20,000 pages based on one page per job and 30,000 pages based on three pages per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages).
The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
5
Approximately 50,000 pages based on two pages per job and 60,000 pages based on three pages per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages).
The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Related Information
• Appendix
374
Home > Appendix > Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Toner Cartridge Life
This product detects the life of the toner cartridges using the following two methods:
• Detection by counting the dots of each color that are necessary to create an image
• Detection by counting the rotations of the developer roller
The print operation will stop when either of the upper limits is reached. The upper limit is set above the number of
dots or rotations that would be required for the cartridge to perform consistently with its advertised page yield.
This function is intended to reduce the risk of poor print quality and damage to the machine.
There are two messages that indicate when the toner is low or needs replacing: Toner Low and Replace Toner.
Toner Low is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer roller nears its
maximum count. Replace Toner is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer
roller reaches its maximum count.
Color Correction
The number of developer roller rotations that is counted may not only be for normal operations, such as printing
and copying, but also for machine adjustments, such as Color Calibration and Color Registration.
Color Calibration (Adjustment of Color Density)
To obtain stable print quality, the density of each toner cartridge needs to be maintained at a fixed value. If the
density balance between the colors cannot be kept, the tint becomes unstable, and accurate color reproduction
becomes impossible. The toner density can change due to chemical changes to the toner that affect its electrical
charge, deterioration of the developer unit, and temperature and humidity levels in the machine. During
calibration, the density level adjustment test patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Calibration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When you start the Color Correction from the control panel or the printer driver to improve the color density.
• When you replace a used toner cartridge or drum unit with a new one.
• When the machine detects that the ambient temperature and humidity have changed.
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Color Registration (Correction of Color Position)
In this machine, the drum unit and developer unit are prepared for black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan
(C), respectively. Four color images are combined into one image, and therefore color registration errors (for
example, how the four color images align) may occur. When registration errors occur, registration correction test
patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Registration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When you start the Color Correction to clear the color registration error.
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Related Information
• Appendix
375
Home > Appendix > Accessories
Accessories
Availability of accessories may vary depending on your country or region. For more information about the
accessories for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your Brother dealer or Brother Customer
Service.
Order No. Items Applicable Models
LT-310CL Lower Tray (250 sheets) HL-L3295CDW
Related Information
• Appendix
376
Home > Appendix > Brother Help and Customer Support
Brother Help and Customer Support
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from
within that country.
>> FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
>> For Customer Service
>> Ordering Accessories and Supplies
FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
For more information on your Brother machine, visit the Brother support website at support.brother.com. For
additional help and tips, go to your model's FAQs & Troubleshooting page; for the latest drivers and software,
go to your model's Downloads page.
For Customer Service
In USA:
www.brother-usa.com/support (Self-Service/Email/Chat)
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada:
www.brother.ca/support
(Self-Service Videos, Email, Chat, Facebook and Twitter Help)
Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or visit
www.brother-usa.com/support.
Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, visit www.brother.ca/support.
Ordering Accessories and Supplies
We recommend Genuine Brother supplies, which are available at most Brother retailers. If you cannot find the
supplies you need and have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, American Express credit card, or PayPal account,
you can order directly from Brother. Visit us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and
supplies that are available for purchase.
NOTE
In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.
In USA:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
www.brother-usa.com/support
In Canada:
www.brother.ca
377
Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
These machines are approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or
their dealers may only support machines purchased in their own countries.
USA/CAN
Version 0
